JP7454258B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, as described in Patent Document 1 below, for example, a movable body under the starting hole is rotated in response to a ball entering a first starting hole, and the starting hole is rotated. A gaming machine is known that can perform a win-win effect in which a lower lamp flashes.

JP 2019-150713 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine that performs a performance in response to a ball entering the starting port, such as the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
It is possible to control the advantageous state advantageous to the player,
comprising a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section capable of indicating the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state by a difference in emitted light color;
When winning a prize in a predetermined starting slot, there are cases where the first light emitting part emits light and cases where the second light emitting part emits light,
A pending display can be displayed in response to winning in the predetermined starting slot,
The pending display can be displayed in any of a plurality of display colors having different expectations,
When executing a hold change effect in which the hold display is displayed in a special display color that has a higher expectation level than the normal display color among the plurality of display colors when winning a prize in the predetermined starting slot, There are times when a specific light emitting effect is performed in conjunction with which the first light emitting section emits light in a color corresponding to a display color, and there are times when the specific light emitting effect is not performed.
When the specific light emitting effect is executed in conjunction with the pending change effect, the level of expectation is higher than when the pending change effect is executed and the specific light emitting effect is not executed. This is a gaming machine with special features.

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game through performance.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view showing the second grand prize winning device etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the under-board movable device are activated. It is a front view. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a sub-control board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view showing a 7-segment display. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to general drawings, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special drawings. (A) is an example of a hit determination table, (B) is an example of a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is an example of a reach determination table. This is an example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is an example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is an example of a look-ahead determination table. This is an example of a jackpot game control table. It is an explanatory diagram of a game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of production mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SP reach of the special figure variation effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a hold effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable body effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of operation performance. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a front view of a game board unit related to a characteristic part of pachinko game machine PY1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board related to the characteristic parts of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. This is a jackpot game control table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1. This is a fluctuation pattern determination table relating to the characteristic part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and is a fluctuation pattern determination table of the special drawing 1 in a low probability non-time saving state. It is a diagram showing a specific example of battle reach. It is a diagram showing a specific example of story reach. This is a look-ahead judgment table relating to a characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1, and is a look-ahead judgment table for special chart 1 in a low-probability non-time-saving state. This is a lottery table with pending changes. This is a lottery table for hold change timing. This is a lottery table with a heso lamp lighting effect. This is a lottery table with a chance lamp lighting effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example of a chance lamp light emission effect. It is a table showing an example of performance execution in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a case where a pending change performance and a belly button light emission performance are performed at the time of starting winning. It is a diagram showing a case where a chance lamp light emission effect is performed at the time of starting winning. It is a diagram showing a case where a pending change effect, a navel lamp light emission effect, and a chance lamp light emission effect are performed at the time of starting winning. It is a diagram showing a case where a chance lamp light emission effect is performed at the time of starting winning, and a hold change effect and a belly button light emission effect are performed when the shift display of the hold display is performed. It is a lottery table of a chance lamp light emission effect according to a second embodiment. It is a lottery table of a pending change scenario according to a third embodiment. It is a lottery table with a heso lamp lighting effect when winning a prize according to the third embodiment. It is a table showing an example of performance execution in the third embodiment. A diagram showing the excess prize ball prevention function provided in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls. (A) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of an over-prize ball abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing a performance mode in the case of a magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball preview image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop preview image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple border image is displayed in the high accuracy high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red border image is displayed in the high accuracy high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when the special reset switch is pressed, and (B) is a diagram showing when one hour has elapsed in the customer waiting state. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of input processing. It is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of output processing. It is a flowchart of outer end signal output processing. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference number of balls in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference number of balls is displayed on a 7 segment display in the modification of 4th Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a determination table of jackpot symbol types and small winning symbol types according to the fifth embodiment, and is a table explaining types of jackpots and small wins. It is a determination table of losing symbol types according to the fifth embodiment, and is a table explaining types of losing. It is a table showing the types of a hit determination table, a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and an electric chew opening pattern table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing according to a fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a figure etc. which shows the display screen of each production mode based on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the RUSH entry performance based on 5th Embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, embodiments of a gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In this specification, in order to simplify the description, by writing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, parts, etc. for the symbols or codes may be omitted or May be abbreviated. Furthermore, in any flowchart described below, the execution order of a plurality of processes in any plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel within a range that does not cause inconsistency in the processing contents.

1. Structure of the gaming machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be explained. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 5. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" is the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "back" is the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1. shall be.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU to be described later is attached, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board mounting frame 2A and the transparent plate 23t face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t only needs to be able to visually recognize the gaming area 6 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball to make the game ball fire (the amount by which the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is being Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k. Further, a lower decorative body 36 that largely protrudes forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 for storing game balls to be supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36. Further, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

A first input device (hereinafter referred to as "normal button") 40 that can be pressed down is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . In addition, a second input device (hereinafter referred to as a "special button") 41 that can be pressed downward is provided on the right decorative body 32 that is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. . The normal button 40 is configured to be able to vibrate. That is, the normal button 40 has a built-in vibration mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40, and when the vibration motor included in this vibration mechanism is driven, the normal button 40 vibrates to the extent that the player can visually see it. 40 is now vibrating. Note that a known configuration can be appropriately adopted as a vibration mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40. The normal button 40 is an example of an operation section and also an example of a vibrating body.

Further, a speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 that is formed to protrude forward from the upper part of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 includes a left speaker 52L placed on the left side and a right speaker 52R placed on the right side. Further, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 in the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached above the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m as a performance device for the purpose of increasing game interest. The frame moving device 58 includes a left frame moving device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame moving device 58R arranged on the right side.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using mainly FIGS. 2 to 5. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. At approximately the center of the game board 1, an opening 1A is formed which is approximately circular when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall 1B is formed to protrude forward and define a game area 6 through which game balls can flow. Further, on the outside of the inner wall portion 1B, a substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is formed to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a game area 6 is formed which is surrounded by an inner wall part 1B, an outer wall part 1C, etc. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nail enters the game area 6 and moves the game ball flowing down the game area 6 through a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first winning opening 14, which will be described later. And, a route is configured to appropriately guide the player to the second grand prize opening 15 and the like. In addition, starting ports such as the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are referred to as entry ports, and large winning ports such as the first large winning port 14 and the second large winning port 15 are referred to as special winning ports or specific winning ports. The gate can be called a passage port or a passage area.

Near the center of the game area 6, a center frame (center decoration) 61 is provided to decorate the periphery of the opening 1A. The center frame 61 is provided with a stage that can guide a game ball to a first starting port 11, which will be described later, and a warp that can guide a game ball to the stage.

Also, in the gaming area 6, there is a first starting winning device 11D in which a first starting opening 11 into which a game ball can enter is formed, and a second starting winning device 11D that allows or disables entry of the ball into the second starting opening 12. A starting winning device (so-called "electronic chew") 12D is provided.

The first starting winning device 11D is immovable. Therefore, the ease with which game balls enter the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). Winning the game ball into the first starting hole 11 is achieved by drawing the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 1, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 1 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 1. Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D includes an operable electric tube opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 12. When the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can enter the second starting port 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D, and only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 12. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. Further, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is opened", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is also referred to as "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

Winning a game ball into the second starting hole 12 is achieved by drawing a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2") (obtaining and determining a random number related to Special Figure 2, which will be described later: hereinafter referred to as "Special Figure 2 Lottery"). ) and the variable display of special map 2. Furthermore, when the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a guide stage 12g that guides the game ball to the second starting port 12.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 10 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the lottery of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol") (that is, the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number: hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery") and the variable display of a regular symbol. It has become. The electric chew 12D is opened by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game that involves opening the electric chew 12D.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT14D") in which a first big winning opening 14 into which a game ball can enter is formed. The first big prize winning device 14D includes a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can operate in an open state and a closed state. The first big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that closes the first big prize opening 14, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning opening 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 14. In this way, the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the first grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the gaming area 6 is provided with a second grand prize winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") in which a second grand prize opening 15 into which game balls can enter is formed. The second big prize winning device 15D includes an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can take an open state. The game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 15 only when the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second grand prize opening 15 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second big prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize winning device 15D will be explained in detail using FIG. 3. Inside the second big winning device 15D, there is provided a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a that can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 and allow the game ball to pass downward. It is being

A specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter) are provided in the downstream area of the second big prize opening sensor 15a. The game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening sensor 15a are sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The sorting device 16D includes a sorting member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in a first state (passage prevention state: in a front view of FIG. 3(A), the left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above) that prevents the game ball from passing through to the specific area 16. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, after a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15 passes through the second large prize opening sensor 15a, it cannot pass through the specific area 16 and passes through the non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second large prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called the first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: the distribution member 16k is shaken when viewed from the front in FIG. 3(B)). The left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above it, leaving the area directly above the specific area 16 open. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from this second big prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Note that basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Then, only in a predetermined round game (for example, 16R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can change to the second state. Note that the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect the game ball that has passed through (entered) each area 16, 17 and allow the game ball to pass downward. .

Note that it is possible to provide only one of the first grand prize device 14D and the second grand prize device 15D within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, depending on the gameplay, it is possible to provide a configuration in which two grand prize devices without a specific area or distribution device, such as the first grand prize device 14D, are provided. In addition, although the first grand prize winning device 14D and the second grand prize winning device 15D are provided, depending on the gameplay, it is possible to use only the first grand prize winning device 14D or only the second grand prize winning device 15D. It is possible to use In addition, when the configuration is such that only the first grand prize winning device 14D is used, the processing related to the second grand prize winning device 15D is not performed, and when the configuration is made that only the second grand prize winning device 15D is used, , it is assumed that no processing is performed regarding the first grand prize winning device 14D.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, at approximately the bottom of the game area 6, there are two holes for discharging game balls that are hit into the game area 6 but do not win in any of the winning slots to the outside of the game area 6. An out port 19 is provided. Furthermore, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 that can emit light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B (second game area) on the right side. can. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the left hand is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with the right hand. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second starting port 12, a general winning port 10, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided. Therefore, the player can pass through the gate 13, enter the second starting opening 12, the general winning opening 10, and the first big winning opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the right hand. Or, you can aim to win a prize in the second grand prize opening 15.

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning holes (first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, general winning hole 10, first big winning hole 14, and second big winning hole 15), It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Further, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (a portion other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays special figure 2, and a special figure 2 display 81b that variably displays general figure 1. A general figure display 82 is included. In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 pending display 83a that displays the number of special figure 1 pending (U1: the number of variable displays of special figure 1 on the special figure 1 display 81a), which will be described later. Also included is a special figure 2 pending display 83b that displays the number of special figure 2 pending (U2: the number of reserved special figures 2 that is variablely displayed by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is held in response to the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 12. In addition, in the following explanation, special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are collectively referred to as special pattern or special pattern, and special pattern 1 lottery and special pattern 2 lottery are collectively referred to as special pattern lottery. Moreover, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed variably and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stopping special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, that is, a jackpot symbol), the grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 14 and the second grand prize opening 15) is opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played. Note that the gaming state in which the jackpot game is being played is referred to as the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot gaming state is an example of a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

The special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special drawing display 81 will display "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, A jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed, such as (: off). In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the special drawing display 81 will display a losing pattern consisting of only the rightmost LED lighting up, such as "■■■■■■■□". Display. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the manner of variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as when all LEDs flash at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific manner).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball hits the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (an example of determination information) for performing a special drawing lottery etc. are generated. May be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in a special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later, as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the various random numbers obtained by winning (balls entering) the game ball into the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1 related random numbers", and the various random numbers obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12 The various random numbers obtained by (ball entry) are referred to as "special map 2 related random numbers." Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figure 1 reservations) and the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figure 2 reservations). An upper limit (four in this embodiment) is set. The upper limit of the number of special figures 1 and the number of special figures 2 reserved can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be set to "none". In addition, hereinafter, the special map 1 reservation and the special map 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special map reservation", and the number of special diagrams 1 and 2 reserved are collectively referred to as "the number of special diagrams reserved". In addition, the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 2 related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special figure related random numbers."

In the pachinko game machine PY1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically, while the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If a prize is won during execution of a jackpot game or a jackpot game, the variable display of the special drawing (or the right to draw the special drawing) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 is consumed when variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, extinguishing the special figure reservation means determining the special figure related random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of the special figure to show the determination result.

Then, the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation display 83. Each of the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special symbols reserved. Is possible.

Further, the variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed variably and then stopped. The stationary general map (the stationary general map, the general map derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one general map selected from among a plurality of types of general maps by lottery. If the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure (ordinary figure with a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The common map display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the common map according to the result of the general map lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the common symbol lottery is a win, the common symbol display 82 displays a winning symbol consisting of both LEDs lighting up, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). If the result of the lottery is a loss, a loss pattern such as "■□" consisting of only the right LED being lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is variablely displayed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of variable display of the ordinary map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of variable display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs blinking at once, unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a regular symbol random number (an example of determination information) for performing a regular symbol lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the below-mentioned normal pattern holding storage section 106 on the condition that the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not executed. An upper limit (four in the present embodiment) is set for the number of standard patterns that can be stored in the standard pattern storage unit 106 (the number of standard patterns held). The upper limit of the number of reserved general drawings can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be set to "none". In addition, below, the normal pattern random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 13 is also referred to as the "normal pattern related random number." Further, in this embodiment, a general pattern reservation display for displaying the number of general pattern reservations is not provided, but a general pattern reservation display device may be added to the display devices 8. As the general figure reservation display, it is possible to employ, for example, one having the same configuration as the special figure reservation display 83.

Next, the production unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained using FIG. The production unit 1U is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. The performance unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "top board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as "bottom board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is configured with, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section (display screen) 50a that can display a 3D image. Note that the image display device 50 may be any other display device, such as one configured with a plurality of liquid crystal displays or an EL (Electro Luminescence) display, as long as it is capable of displaying images. You can.

The on-board movable device 55 is configured to be movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k. The under-panel movable device 56 is configured to be movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated under-panel movable body 56k.

FIG. 5A schematically shows how the above-panel movable body 55k and the under-panel movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not operating. When the drive source of the on-panel movable device 55 is driven, the on-panel movable body 55k moves downward (down), and when the drive source of the under-panel movable device 56 is driven, the under-panel movable body 56k moves upward (raised). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered on-board movable body 55k or the raised under-board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has various functions such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general drawing drawing, a variable display of a general drawing, and auxiliary games. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as the "main control board") 100 that controls gaming profits (progress of the game), and a game performance (special figure variation performance, hold performance, operation performance, jackpot) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 A performance control board (hereinafter referred to as "sub control board") 120 that controls performances such as game performances (game performances, etc.) and customer waiting performances, and a payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., are installed on the game board 1. It is provided further on the back side than the image display device 50. The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls games. Further, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as a production control section (sub-control section) that controls production, together with an image control board 140, a lamp control circuit 151, and an audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The production control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various types of production using production means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, panel lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, etc.). It would be good if the performance could be controlled.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, sub-control board 120, and payout control board 170, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed down. When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means) clears game information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described later) (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, the number of special symbols on hold). This is for clearing (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100 or a dedicated board. It's okay.

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190. The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to a gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and a production RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the power is cut off to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, a power switch 193 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches the power on/off. Note that the main control board 100 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100, or the sub-control board 120 may be provided with a backup power circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The gaming control microcomputer 101 includes a gaming ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a gaming RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a gaming ROM 103 is included.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, which will be described later. , auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with the above-mentioned special symbol reservation storage section 105, regular symbol reservation storage section 106, and the like. Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage section 107, and the non-erasable storage section 107 is provided with a total prize ball number storage section 107a, a total fired ball number storage section 107b, and a difference ball number storage section 107c. It is being In the non-erasable storage section 107, even if RAM clear is executed, the gaming CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents. The non-erasable storage unit 107 (total award ball number storage unit 107a, total fired ball number storage unit 107b, difference ball number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and includes a total of 32 lighting (light-emitting) parts. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes, in order from left to right, a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting parts (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so that they can each represent numbers from "0" to "9". It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as an operating means when setting a setting value corresponding to the probability of determining a big win. With a setting key (not shown) inserted inside the setting key cylinder 180, it is rotated between an initial position and a rotation position. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 191, it is possible to transition to a setting mode in which a setting value can be set. In this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko game machine PY1, only one setting value, "1", is provided. Therefore, the setting value cannot be changed from "1". Note that when the setting mode is set, if the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed down. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 placed on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the gaming hall who can open and close the front door 23. That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be explained in detail later. Furthermore, a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board 100.

Furthermore, various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

Various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting hole sensor 11a, a second starting hole sensor 12a, a general winning hole sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning hole sensor 14a, a second A big prize opening sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a are included.

The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The general winning hole sensor 10a is provided for each general winning hole 10. The gate sensor 13a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 13. The first big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 14. The second big winning hole sensor 15a detects the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15. The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the main control board 100.

Although not shown in FIG. 6, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor that detects all the game balls (total number of shot balls) flowing down the game area 6. Here, the game balls flowing down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the lower part of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the discharge port sensor is provided within the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects the magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter a game ball into the various winning holes 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. When each of the above-mentioned sensors detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content.

Further, the various sensors MS include a front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 23 to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor that detects opening of the front frame 23m to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detected content. When the front frame sensor detects the opening of the front frame 23m, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the main control board 100. Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s, a first big winning hole solenoid 14s, a second big winning hole solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big prize opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big prize opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to displays 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for monitoring payout. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. The firing device 72 is also connected via the firing control circuit 175. Note that the firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 to pay out prize balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. , pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170.

Further, the firing device 72 is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. Further, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing solenoid 72s so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160. That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. The external terminal board 160 is for transmitting an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the gaming status, and information indicating an error or fraud (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Furthermore, although the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, the main control board 100 may be connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

Further, the main control board 100 transmits various commands containing information regarding the game to the sub control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The sub control board 120 can grasp the progress status of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 based on various commands sent from the main control board 100. Note that the connection between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and performance ROM 123. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

Further, the production ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 120 is equipped with an I/O port section 138 for performance and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 for inputting and outputting data and signals. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power when the pachinko game machine PY1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates using power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided therein. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not turned on. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be used as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub-control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the sub-control board 120 controls the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the image display device based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100. 50 display control is performed. Note that the connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It is equipped with Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100. Output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be used as a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various switches serving as input sections, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120. Further, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Further, the sub-control board 120 controls the lighting of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

The various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 is pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal according to the detected content to the sub-control board 120. Note that the type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include an on-panel drive motor 55 m that drives the on-panel movable device 55 , an under-panel drive motor 56 m that drives the under-panel movable device 56 , and an under-panel drive motor 56 m that drives the frame movable device 58 . It includes a frame drive motor 58m, etc. The performance control microcomputer 121 can drive these motors and cause each movable device to perform a predetermined operation. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. It is also assumed that a vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the normal button 40 is also connected to the sub-control board 120. Note that the type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a panel lamp 54, and the like. The performance control microcomputer 121 can cause each lamp to emit light. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of each lamp and control the operation of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM. Further, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 10 to 17. Note that the tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 17 are general ones for explaining this item, and tables other than these are shown in the explanation of "Characteristics of Pachinko Machine PY1" described later. In this case, it is assumed that the table is used in the pachinko game machine PY1. However, for configurations that do not show a separate table in the explanation of "Characteristics of Pachinko machine PY1" described later, it is assumed that the table shown in this item is used. It is also possible to change the configuration in which a different table is shown in the explanation of "Characteristics" to the table shown in this item.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular lottery when the fired game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, passing the game ball through the gate 13 will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern starting condition".

When the pachinko game machine PY1 performs such a series of games (general drawing lottery, variable display of general drawings, auxiliary game), the pachinko game machine PY1 acquires general drawing related random numbers when the general drawing starting condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the acquired ordinary symbol-related random numbers include ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining a hit. Random numbers are also called judgment information. A range is appropriately set for the random number.

3-1-1. Win Judgment The win judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) according to the hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table is associated with a gaming state that will be described later. That is, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table). In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number values) are assigned to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 determines whether it is a hit or a loss by determining the acquired normal symbol random number according to the hit determination table. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, a normal pattern variation pattern is determined for variable display of the normal pattern. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the hit determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state.

3-1-2. Ordinary figure fluctuation The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern according to the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 11(B). The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the time saving state. There is a short-time regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table). Incidentally, it is not necessary to divide the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for each gaming state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol (losing common symbol) is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is Regarding the variable display of ordinary figures in the case where the ordinary figures are stopped and displayed, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined such that the common symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display of figures, a general figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. A variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time corresponding to the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. Further, these regular figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery).

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game according to the auxiliary game control table as shown in FIG. 11(C) based on the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). The auxiliary game control table is associated with a game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Note that the number of openings and opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

In the pachinko game machine PY1, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is made different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 0.08 seconds)). In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to make the game ball enter the electric chew 12D (for example, 3.0 seconds)). Open. In the following, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". Note that the opening time of the electric chew 12D may be the same in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbol 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. On the other hand, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, below, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

Pachinko game machine PY1 acquires a special pattern-related random number when a starting condition is established in order to play a series of games like this (special pattern lottery, variable display of special pattern, jackpot game, and setting of the game state). Perform various judgments regarding random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10(B), the special pattern related random numbers to be obtained include special pattern random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot pattern type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number for determining reach. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Random numbers are also called judgment information. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot Judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) according to a jackpot judgment table as shown in FIG. 12(A). The jackpot determination table is associated with the gaming state, specifically whether it is a normal probability state or a high probability state. That is, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table).

In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss by determining the acquired special symbol random number according to the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination is a process for determining the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) according to the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 12(B) when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is a judgment. Each type of jackpot symbol is associated with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot consisting of game benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (Special Figure 1/Special Figure 2), in other words, the prize that causes the jackpot symbol type determination (the prize that causes the jackpot symbol type determination) It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12) in which the starting port was performed. That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of jackpot symbol by determining the acquired jackpot symbol type random number according to the jackpot symbol type determination table. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type based on the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is set to 50% for jackpot symbol A and 50% for jackpot symbol B, and for special symbol 2. It is possible for the jackpot symbol C to make the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type 100% based on the jackpot symbol type determination. In this way, the jackpot symbol type is determined in the special drawing 1 lottery, which is held when a game ball enters the first starting opening 11, and the special drawing 2 drawing, which is held when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 12. It is possible to have different fractions.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the special figure variation effect described later, in accordance with the reach judgment table as shown in FIG. 12 (C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. It is a judgment.

The reach determination table is associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time saving state (time saving reach determination table). Note that the reach determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is assigned to the reach determination results of "reach exists (reach occurs)" and "reach does not occur (reach does not occur)" . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether there is a reach or not (whether or not to generate a reach) by determining the obtained reach random number according to the reach determination table. As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach random values for which it is determined that there is a "reach" (reach occurs) is different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. Note that the probability of determining that there is a reach can be changed as appropriate. In the following, "with reach" (which causes reach), which is performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", is referred to as "reach with reach", and "without reach (which does not cause reach)". This is sometimes referred to as a "no-reach loss."

3-2-4. Special pattern fluctuation pattern determination To judge the special pattern fluctuation pattern, use the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) shown in FIGS. This is a determination to determine the figure fluctuation pattern), and is performed whether the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (performance content) of the special symbol variation performance. The identification information included in the special figure fluctuation pattern can be changed as appropriate. Further, as the special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns each having different identification information, and the number thereof can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that displays a variable display that is subject to judgment (special pattern 1/special pattern 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning that is the cause of the special pattern variation pattern determination is made. (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 13) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) used when performing this. In addition, it is not necessary to divide the special symbol variation pattern determination table according to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1/special symbol 2).

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is also associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving), and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) is further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. In addition, it is not necessary to divide the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot determination result or the reach determination result.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss is also associated with the number of reserved special figures. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. In addition, each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for no-reach losing is also associated with the number of reserved special figures. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for. Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table does not need to be divided according to the number of reserved special figures.

Then, the special figure display device 81 performs a variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Ru.

Further, each special figure variation pattern is associated with a production flow of a special figure variation production as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 13 to 14. Note that it is not necessary to associate the production flow of the special symbol variation performance with the special symbol variation pattern.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the tables in Figures 13 and 14, the special pattern fluctuation pattern can be called by a name associated with the special pattern (jackpot determination result) and the production content of the special pattern fluctuation performance. be. For example, a special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot variation," and a special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is called a "loss variation." Among the jackpot fluctuations, the special pattern fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called "SP jackpot fluctuation", and the special pattern fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L jackpot fluctuation". A special pattern variation pattern in which the special pattern variation effect ends at N reach is called "N jackpot variation", and a special pattern variation pattern in which doubles are aligned as soon as the reach is established is called "immediate jackpot variation". To tell. On the other hand, a special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed in a loss with reach is called "SP loss variation", and a special pattern variation pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed. is called "L loss variation", and the special symbol variation pattern where the special symbol variation performance ends with N reach, which is a type of reach, is called "N loss variation", and the special symbol variation pattern related to no reach loss is called "N loss variation". It is called "normal loss fluctuation." There are three types of normal loss fluctuations (normal A loss fluctuations, normal B loss fluctuations, and normal C loss fluctuations) with different variation times. In addition, a special figure variation pattern related to a no-reach loss and a special figure variation pattern with a shorter variation time than a "normal loss variation" is referred to as a "shortened loss variation". There are two types of shortening loss fluctuations with different variation times (shortening A loss fluctuations and shortening B loss fluctuations). In addition, when SP jackpot and SP loss fluctuation are collectively referred to as SP fluctuation or SP reach fluctuation.

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related random number according to the pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIG. The look-ahead determination is performed before the jackpot determination (specifically, for example, when winning a prize in the starting slot). The look-ahead determination includes, for example, determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, determining which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be in the jackpot symbol type determination, and determining whether the special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot symbol type determination. There is a determination as to which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special figure variation pattern determination. The pre-reading determination table is associated with the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning prize. That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a pre-reading determination table when winning in the first starting opening 11 (first reading determining table) and a pre-reading determining table when winning in the second starting opening 12 (second pre-reading determination table). There is. Since the first starting port 11 is the starting port that triggers the lottery of the special drawing 1, the first pre-reading determination table can also be called the special drawing 1 pre-reading determination table. Further, since the second starting port 12 is the starting port that triggers the lottery of the special figure 2, the second pre-reading determination table can also be referred to as the special pattern 2 pre-reading determination table. Note that the pre-reading determination table does not need to be divided according to the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12).

Further, the pre-reading determination table is also associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a look-ahead decision table used in a non-time-saving state (a look-ahead decision table for non-time savings) and a look-ahead decision table used in a time-saving state (a look-ahead decision table for time savings). .

In other words, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead decision table used in the non-time saving state, a first look-ahead decision table used in the time save state, and a second look-ahead decision table used in the non-time save state. and a second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. Note that the pre-reading determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state. Moreover, what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be explained. A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and a round game from the start of the jackpot until the start of the first round. It includes an opening (also written as OP) and an ending (also written as ED) from the end of the final round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, it is possible to not provide OP and ED. Note that, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)," and the 10th round game is called "10 rounds (10R)."

The elements constituting such a jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) in each round game, It includes the type and opening time of each grand prize opening to be opened, the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time or interval time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). There is. After the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game (for example, jackpot games A to C). In each jackpot game, from 1R to 15R is a round game in which the first big winning hole 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the first big winning hole 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. , is carried out. In 16R (final round), a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second grand prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds is played. It will be done. In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensors 14a, 15a, the maximum opening time of the big winning holes 14, 15 has not elapsed. However, the round game ends.

The jackpot game A shown in FIG. 16 is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A (see FIG. 12(B)), and the jackpot game B is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol. B, and the jackpot game C can be executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol C.

Further, the number of times and time for each jackpot game component can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot game can be played using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15, or only one of them. In the case of a configuration in which only jackpot games are played using only the first jackpot 14, or a configuration in which only jackpot games are played using only the second jackpot 15, the unused jackpot is not provided. You can also use it as Further, the number of types of jackpot games that can be executed may be plural or one type.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 has a closed state in which prizes cannot be won and an open state in which prizes can be won by the distribution member 16k, so the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16. In the following, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." Furthermore, the state in which the specific region 16 is in the open state is also referred to as "V-open", and the state in which the specific region 16 is in the closed state is also referred to as "V-closed".

The distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operating manner (that is, the specific area 16 is controlled in a constant opening/closing manner). For example, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized for 15 seconds after the second big prize opening 15 starts opening, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big prize opening 15, the time and the period during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. From the relationship with the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second big winning hole 15, and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state. Due to the relationship with timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to cause the game ball to enter the specific area 16). In this way, the combination of the fixed operation mode of the distribution member 16k (the fixed opening/closing mode of the specific area 16) and the opening/closing mode of the second big prize opening 15 in the jackpot game allows the game balls to be distributed to the specific area in the jackpot game. It is possible to set the difficulty (ease) of entering 16. Note that the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate. When another operating mode is shown in the description of "Characteristics of Pachinko Game Machine PY1" to be described later, it is assumed that this operating mode is adopted in Pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are set in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The activated jackpot is called a "V long jackpot", and the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. A jackpot is called a "V-short jackpot."

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state", "high probability high base gaming state", and " It is possible to set the game state to any one of the "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability low base state", "low probability high base gaming state" is referred to as "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base gaming state" is referred to as "high probability". The "low base state" and the "high probability high base gaming state" are sometimes abbreviated as the "high probability high base state," respectively. The gaming states include a state related to the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the jackpot determination, and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low probability low base gaming state" or the "low probability high base gaming state" and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is the normal probability. The high probability state is set in the "high probability low base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high probability state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, in a jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is possible to switch to a high probability state. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. It is assumed that whether the trigger for switching to the high probability state is V passing or the type of jackpot symbol is determined in advance depending on the desired gameplay. In the high probability state, it is possible to switch from the high probability state to the normal probability state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in a "low probability low base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" or "jackpot gaming state". The time saving state is set in the "low probability high base gaming state" or the "high probability high base gaming state", and is a gaming state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state. It is. For example, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is longer (for example, 3.0 seconds) than the opening time (for example, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the special pattern variation pattern judgment is performed according to the special pattern variation pattern judgment table that is set so that the special pattern variation pattern with a short special pattern variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. (See Figures 13-14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

Further, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, a regular pattern fluctuation time (5 seconds) is determined which is shorter than the regular pattern fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state (FIG. 11(B)). Therefore, in the short time state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater.

In addition, the time-saving state is more likely to be judged as a hit in the hit judgment than the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a hit is judged with a higher probability (e.g., 59936/65536) than the probability of a hit being judged as a hit in the non-time-saving state (e.g., 6600/65536) (Figure 11 (A)). Therefore, the time-saving state is judged as a hit more often per unit time.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time saving state is set. For example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. In the time-saving state, it is possible to change from the time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by performing jackpot determination a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time saving state, compared to the non-time saving state, it is easier to win a prize, the normal pattern fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer. In other words, three points are set to be advantageous to the player regarding the game related to the common map. However, only some of these points may be set advantageously for this player. Moreover, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving state does not have to be such that a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is more easily selected than that in the non-time saving state.

The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 after it is powered on for the first time is a "low probability low base gaming state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time saving state are set. This gaming state is also referred to as a "normal gaming state." In addition, in the "jackpot game state", the general drawing lottery (win determination regarding general drawings) is carried out, but the special drawing lottery (jackpot judgment) is not performed, so the non-time saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. Ru. Furthermore, regarding the gaming states, it is possible to use all or only some of the gaming states described above. Further, the various gaming states described in this specification can be arbitrarily expressed in the form of "nth gaming state" (n is an integer of 1 or more). In addition, a low probability low base gaming state (low probability low base state) is a low probability non-time saving state, a low probability high base gaming state (low probability high base state) is a low probability time saving state, a high probability low base gaming state (high probability The low base state) can be called a high probability non-time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state (high probability high base state) can be called a high probability time saving state.

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 18 to 24.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special symbol fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variation production and indicates that it is in a standby state where no special symbol variation production is being performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A-1), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume settings for sounds output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for effects to be performed.

The normal performance mode can be set when a special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability low base game state" or the "high probability low base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates a non-time saving state. be. The normal presentation mode includes, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image representing a daytime mountain scene (daytime normal background image G102) is displayed on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-1). 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image representing an evening mountain scene (evening normal background image G103) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and FIG. 18(B-2). -3) As shown in 3), there is a third normal performance mode in which a background image representing a mountain scenery at night (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display section 50a. It can be switched on the condition that the special figure variation effect is performed once or multiple times. Furthermore, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a normal second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the normal first stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the normal second stage production mode, depending on the type of reach A dedicated background image will be displayed. Furthermore, a special performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when a special symbol variation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode that indicates a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the probability variable performance mode includes a probability variable first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol fluctuation performance, and a probability variable second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the probability variable first stage production mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the probability variation second stage production mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special symbol variation performance is being performed in the "low probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates the normal probability state and the time-saving state. In the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving performance mode includes a time-saving first stage performance mode before the reach is established in the special symbol variation performance, and a time-saving second stage performance mode after the reach is established. In the time-saving first performance mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display section 50a, but in the time-saving second stage performance mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening performance in which the winning image G108 is displayed is performed. During a round in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-2), a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed on the display unit 50a. A round performance will be held. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), on the display section 50a, an ending image G111 indicating the performance mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of paid out prize balls are displayed. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G112 is displayed.

Note that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special Figure Variation Effect Next, the special figure variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, the result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of the performance symbols.

In addition, in the special figure variation production, in addition to the variable display of production symbols, various displays such as the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, normal button 40, special button 41, etc. It is possible to perform other performances using similar performance equipment. In this case, even after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue performing other performances.

4-2-1. Effect pattern display area As shown in FIG. 19(A), the display part 50a of the image display device 50 has left effects on the left side, center, and right side of the display area 50a, which is divided approximately equally into three parts in the horizontal direction. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle performance symbol area 50b2, and a right performance symbol area 50b3. The left performance symbol area 50b1 is an area where the left performance symbol EZ1 is displayed when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation performance. Similarly, the middle performance symbol area 50b2 and the right performance symbol region 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle performance symbol EZ2 and the right performance symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in one section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area where the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left presentation pattern area 50b1. , the middle effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are described to represent the range, and are not actually displayed. Further, the range of each area can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-2. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special symbols starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display section 50a, and From the state in which the small left pattern KZ1, the small medium pattern KZ2, and the small right pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is waiting, as shown in FIG. 19(B) As shown in FIG. 2, with the start of the process, variable display of performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is also started. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of this special symbol is, for example, "normal loss variation", the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are different, as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1). After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called flop) that suggests a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stopping manner, and a reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continued, and a reach effect according to the special pattern variation pattern is performed. Note that the stopping order and stopping manner of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established in the normal variation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In N reach, as shown in FIG. 20(A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 20(B), the fluctuation speed of the medium effect symbol EZ2 gradually changes. It slows down. If the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N loss variation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. On the other hand, if the special pattern fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", the game will stop in a stopping manner (so-called double) that suggests a jackpot, as shown in Figure 20 (C-2). indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. Note that the content of the N-reach performance is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium performance symbol EZ2, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

In addition, regarding the stopping patterns of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that suggest a loss, the winning pattern when a reach is not established is referred to as a "non-reach winning pattern" or "non-reach losing pattern," and the winning pattern when a reach is achieved is called a ``non-reaching pattern'' or a ``non-reach losing pattern.'' They are called "Reach Barake" or "Reach Loss". How to combine the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the non-reachable numbers (for example, "2, 3, 1" or "5, 8, 6", etc.), and the The effect control microcomputer 121 selects the combination of effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 (for example, "2.1.2" or "5.4.5"). Also, how to combine the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the stopping pattern (double) that suggests a jackpot (for example, "2, 2, 2," "7, 7, 7," etc.) is selected by the performance control microcomputer 121 based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol.

4-2-4. SP Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 representing that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP reach-only performance (for example, a battle performance) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only performance is reached, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation", the display section At 50a, a production suggesting a jackpot is performed (for example, a display in which the main character (one of the ally characters) has won the battle and is standing proudly), and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped indicating a jackpot. (so-called double eye) is stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a jackpot. On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in Figure 21 (C-2), an effect that suggests a loss (for example, an enemy character enters the battle At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stopped manner (so-called ``disappearance'') suggesting a loss. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stopping manner that suggests a loss. Note that the contents of the SP reach performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach will be stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) will be explained in detail. The jackpot expectation level for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the jackpot determination result. For example, the execution probability of N Reach is 10% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and the execution probability of SP Reach is set to 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and the execution probability of SP Reach is set to 10% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose". If the result of jackpot judgment is "Lose", it is set to 4%, and if the result of jackpot determination is "Jackpot", it is set to 100%, then the jackpot expectation level of SP reach is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of N reach. It is possible to do so. In addition, SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP Reach, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and if the result of the Jackpot determination is "Lose", the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2%. If the execution probability of SP Reach B is 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Lose", and 20% if the result of the jackpot determination is "Jackpot", then It is possible to set the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach A higher than the jackpot expectation level of SP Reach B. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation level.

4-2-5. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform L Reach after N Reach. L reach is a production that suggests that the probability that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is lower than SP reach, but higher than N reach, and is a production that makes players expect a jackpot. functions as Note that the execution time of the L reach effect is shorter than the execution time of the SP reach effect (FIGS. 13 and 14). Therefore, in the reach effect of L reach, for example, a shorter video than the reach effect of SP reach is displayed on the display unit 50a. Note that the content of the L reach effect can be changed as appropriate. Further, a special symbol variation pattern may be provided in which the SP reach effect is progressively executed after the L reach effect.

4-3. Pending Icon Display Area As shown in FIG. 22(A), the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a pending icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas. The reservation icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. It is possible to display the hold icon HA in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "2", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and A hold icon HA is displayed in the second display area 50d2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(A), an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area can be provided near the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the same icon TA (also referred to as the pending icon TA) that is the same as the pending icon HA in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. Note that an icon different from the pending icon HA may be displayed as the icon TA.

Note that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the reservation icon display area 50d can be used as a display area that displays both the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number, or can be used as a display area that displays only one of them. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the reserved icon display area 50d is provided but not the icon display area 50e, or a configuration in which both are not provided.

4-3-1. Hold Performance Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform hold performance in response to a game ball entering the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The reservation performance can notify the player of the number of special symbols 1 or 2 reserved.

In the hold effect, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 when the special figure 1 hold count is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, and for example, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting slot 11 during the special figure variation performance, as shown in FIG. 22(C), the first display area 50d1 and the second display area of the reserved icon display area 50d A hold icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is informed that the special figure 1 hold count is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is finished and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22(D), the hold icon displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the hold icon display area 50d HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the hold icon HA that was displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Preview Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special figure variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, input devices (normal button 40, special button 41), etc. It is possible to suggest the results and the results of special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

4-4-1. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as a preview performance. The movable body performance is a performance that operates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win.

In the movable object performance, for example, when N reach progresses to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display part 50a, and develops into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in a space of the display section 50a that does not overlap with the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. This movable body performance is an example of an advanced performance. Note that the movable body performance is not limited to suggesting the development of SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the movable device operated in the movable object performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the performance does not develop (for example, in the case of N loss fluctuation), it is also possible to perform a movable body performance as a so-called fake performance. The movable body performance is also referred to as a movable body drive performance.

4-4-2. Operation performance The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation performance using the normal button 40 and special button 41 as a preview performance. The operation performance is a performance that causes the player to operate the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot.

In the operation performance, for example, in SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the input device (special button 41) is valid, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period, the period shown in FIG. 24(A) occurs. An effect (operation promotion effect) is performed to prompt the user to operate the special button 41. In the operation promotion performance, an operation promotion image G30 is displayed on the display section 50a. The operation promotion image G30 includes an image imitating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (operation method instruction image G32) representing the operation method of the special button 41 (i.e., pressing operation), and the remaining operation validity period. An image representing time (validity period image G33). The valid period image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes over time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the valid operation period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the valid operation period, or after the valid operation period has passed without any special button 41 being operated during the valid operation period, as shown in FIG. 24(B), Then, the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a, indicating the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the operation performance is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Furthermore, an operation promotion performance that prompts the user to operate an operation means (operation unit) such as the special button 41 or the normal button 40 is also referred to as an operation instruction performance.

4-4-3. Pre-read performance The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a pre-read performance for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, as a preview effect. The pre-reading performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the special symbol 1 reservation or the special symbol 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for special drawing 1 hold is "jackpot", the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as ``〇'', in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 22(C). may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "lost", the hold icon HA may be displayed as "☆" as a so-called fake effect. In this way, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are displayed in a special mode (in this embodiment, for example, "☆", also referred to as a special display mode) instead of in a normal mode (in this embodiment, "〇", also referred to as a normal display mode). The look-ahead performance is called the pending change performance. Further, the hold icon HA and the icon TA are collectively referred to as a hold display. In this embodiment, the hold icon HA and the icon TA are displayed as the hold display, but a configuration may be adopted in which only the hold icon HA is displayed and the icon TA is not displayed. In addition, the timing for displaying a special mode of hold in the hold change performance may be when a starting prize that triggers the hold display occurs, or when the hold display is shifted (the display area of the hold icon HA is The special figure variation (so-called variation) corresponding to the pending display may be in progress (when displayed as the icon TA). Further, there may be a plurality of types of special modes of hold display.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the prefetch effect is not limited to changing the display mode of the hold icon HA, and can be changed or added as appropriate. An example of a look-ahead performance other than the pending change performance is a so-called continuous notice.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to Figures 25 to 26. Note that counters, timers, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104.

[1. Main control main processing]
When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the main control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 25 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, power-on processing (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 191 is input. When RAM clearing is executed, gaming information (for example, information on gaming states such as high probability states, information on the number of reserved special drawings, jackpot determination results, etc.) stored in the gaming RAM 104 is erased. As a result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state, low probability non time saving state). However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the difference balls The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the number storage section 107c is not cleared.

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of the various random numbers shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B) are updated by adding 1. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) starts, various changes are made by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003). The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 26, in the main side timer interrupt processing (S005), input processing (S102) is first executed. In the input process (S102), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B) is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt process (S005) and during the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). This is performed both during the period after the completion of S005) and until the start of the next main-side timer interrupt process (S005).

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S107). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Following the special operation process (S107), a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed. Note that the distribution device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big prize winning device 15D is performed. However, the sorting device 16D may be operated in a constant manner from the time the power is turned on.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes output processing (S112). In the output process (S112), the commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each of the above processes are output to the sub control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S113) and ends the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processing (S113) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S113), a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in response to winning of game balls to each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 (see FIG. 25). (after about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection processing (S104), general winning hole sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting hole sensor processing, first starting hole sensor processing, first big winning hole sensor processing, second big winning hole sensor processing, specific area Sensor processing and discharge port sensor processing are performed sequentially. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In the general winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a. In addition, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the regular symbol retention storage section 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. . Note that when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the common symbol reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 2-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 2-related random number is is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is The area is stored in order. In addition, when the special figure 2 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 2 related random number is not stored. Further, a second pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 2 related random number and the second pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 2 pending number command representing the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (special figure 2 pending number) stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b and a second look-ahead judgment are executed. A second starting port sensor command including a second starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first starting port sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a special pattern 1-related random number consisting of a special pattern random number counter, a jackpot pattern type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special pattern variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the obtained special pattern 1-related random number is is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is The area is stored in order. In addition, when the special figure 1 related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired special figure 1 related random number is not stored. Moreover, the first pre-reading determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first pre-reading determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, a special figure 1 pending number command representing the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (special figure 1 pending number) stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a and a first look-ahead judgment are executed. A command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting winning command representing the result is generated.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. In addition, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. In addition, a command for the second big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Further, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the discharge port sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the discharge port sensor.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), a normal symbol standby process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol confirmation process, and an auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 106. In addition, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, a normal pattern variation start command including information regarding the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern is generated. Then, based on the general pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, the general pattern display 82 starts variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal symbol. In the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result as the ordinary symbol fluctuation time elapses after the variable display of the ordinary symbol that is being executed starts. Then, a general pattern variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern is generated.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process, when a predetermined stopping time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol being executed starts, the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. Determine whether it exists or not. If the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. In addition, an auxiliary game control command is generated according to the result of the processing.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special operation process (S107), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol confirmation process, a jackpot game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is a process that is performed not in the jackpot game state but during standby when the special symbol is not variably displayed. In the special symbol standby process, special symbol 2 determination processing and special symbol 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed based on the special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the special symbol 2 reservation storage section 105b, and the special symbol 2 reservation storage section Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1-related random numbers stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a, special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed, and special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed. .

In the special figure 2 judgment process, the special figure random number among the special figure 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b and the jackpot judgment table according to the current gaming state are used. , a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. If the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, jackpot symbol type determination is performed to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number of the special symbol 2 related random numbers and the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined jackpot symbol type is generated. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing the loss is generated. In addition, a plurality of types of losses may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing symbol may be determined. In this case, it is preferable that the symbol designation command includes information indicating the type of losing symbol.

The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 2 determination process. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern random number among the special figure 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b and the special figure 2 according to the current gaming state are used. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a reach determination is made, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. The determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 related random numbers (the number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. Then, a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information related to the special figure 2, information related to the result of jackpot determination, information related to the result of jackpot symbol type determination, information related to the result of reach determination, and information associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern. Contains information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, the special figure 2 display 81b starts variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 2 variation pattern.

The special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process is a process that is performed when the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 related random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 2 related random number in the first area is shifted to the special figure 2 related random number in the first area. Clear from the pending storage section 105b in FIG. In this way, the special figure 2 related random numbers are digested in the order they were acquired. Then, a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 reservations after the processing is generated.

In the special figure 1 determination process, the special figure random number among the special figure 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state are used. , a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. If the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, jackpot symbol type determination is performed to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number of the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined jackpot symbol type is generated. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing the loss is generated. In addition, a plurality of types of losses may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing symbol may be determined. In this case, it is preferable that the symbol designation command includes information indicating the type of losing symbol.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 1 variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a and the special figure 1 according to the current gaming state are used. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, reach determination is made, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. Note that the determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 related random numbers (the number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information related to the special figure 1, information related to the result of jackpot determination, information related to the result of jackpot symbol type determination, information related to the result of reach determination, and information associated with the special figure 1 variation pattern. Contains information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 display 81a starts variable display of the special figure 1.

The special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is a process that is performed when the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the first area side, and the special figure 1 related random number in the first area is shifted to the special figure 1 related random number in the first area. Clear from the pending storage section 105a in FIG. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order they were acquired. Then, a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing is generated.

In addition, if both the number of special drawings 2 and the number of holdings of special drawings 1 exist, the special drawing 2 judgment process is performed with priority, and the variable display of special drawing 2 and the variable display of special drawing 1 are performed in parallel. It is no longer done. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform the special figure 1 determination process even if there is special figure 1 pending when there is special figure 2 pending. Note that the variable display of the special drawing 2 and the variable display of the special drawing 1 may be configured to be performed in the winning order, or may be configured to be performed simultaneously.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of the special symbol. In the special symbol variation process, as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol display device 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol and stops displaying the special symbol according to the result of the jackpot determination. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, a loss symbol indicating a loss is stopped and displayed. Then, a special figure variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure is generated.

[2-3-3. Special design confirmation process]
The special symbol confirmation process is a process that is performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol confirmation process, if the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, a transition is made to a jackpot game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information regarding the result of jackpot symbol type determination. Further, when the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol and the high probability state is to be ended, the normal probability state is set. Then, a high probability termination command indicating transition to the normal probability state is generated. Further, when the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol and the time saving state is to be ended, a non-time saving state is set. Then, a time-saving end command indicating transition to a non-time-saving state is generated. Furthermore, if the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol, and the number of special symbols 2 and 1 pending are "0", the pachinko game machine PY1 is in a waiting state, indicating that it is waiting for a customer. Generate a command.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control processing]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is performed according to the jackpot game control table. After transition to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the passage of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of a round game is generated. Furthermore, in response to ending the final round game, an ending is started. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information regarding the result of jackpot symbol type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting processing]
The game state setting process is a process that is performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the gaming state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot gaming state. When restricting the duration of the high probability state, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that allows the high probability state to continue without winning the jackpot) is also set. Then, a high probability setting command indicating setting of a high probability state is generated. Further, when changing from a non-time saving state to a time saving state, the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When limiting the duration of the time-saving state, the duration of the time-saving state (for example, the number of variable display times of the special symbol that allows the time-saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, a time saving setting command indicating setting of the time saving state is generated.

Note that the commands generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Control of performance by performance control microcomputer 121 Next, control of performance by performance control microcomputer 121 will be described based on FIGS. 27 to 29. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the following explanation of the control of the performance by the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124.

[1. Sub control main processing]
When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the sub-control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 27 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, power-on processing is performed in response to power-on (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for performance determination regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random numbers may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update processing is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the sub-control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various audio performances), and performs lamp control. Via the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the panel lamp 54 are made to emit light (to perform various light emitting effects by emitting light), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are activated (to perform various movable body effects by operation). execute). In this way, various performances (special figure variation performance, hold performance, operation performance, pre-read performance, other preview performances, jackpot game performance, customer waiting performance, control of performance mode, etc.) are realized.

The production control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S112) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[2.1ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1 ms period is input to the sub control board 120. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 28, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), mobile device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input processing, operations on operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a, are detected, and a command is set or performance data is created according to the detection result. In the light emission data output process, lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the panel lamp 54 are caused to emit light at timings that match the image production, etc., based on the production data created in the input processing and production data creation processing described later. Therefore, the light emission data is output to the lamp control circuit 151. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, a movable body performance is performed in which movable devices such as movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are operated at predetermined timings based on performance data created through input processing and performance data creation processing that will be described later. output the drive data. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable body performance in which the movable devices 55, 56, 58, etc. are operated in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process, the watchdog timer is reset.

[3.10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 ms period is input to the sub control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012), as shown in FIG. 29, received command analysis process (S4201), effect timer update process (S4202), audio control process (S4203), and effect data creation process (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the command stored in the reception buffer of the performance RAM 124 by the reception interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, selection of performance, setting of performance mode, setting of commands, etc.) I do. In the effect timer update process, a timer for measuring time related to each effect is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation valid period of the operation units such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing results of the input process and the received command analysis process. In the presentation data creation process, presentation data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

Here, an example of processing when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the performance control microcomputer 121 is a special figure variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). If the production control microcomputer 121 determines in the received command analysis process (S4201) that a special figure fluctuation start command has been received, it performs processing based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command as a process when receiving the fluctuation start command. , selects a production pattern (sub variation pattern) of the special figure variation production, sets information on the sub variation pattern, and sets a variation production start command including information on the sub variation pattern in the output buffer. For example, if the special pattern variation pattern indicated by the special pattern variation start command is SP variation (SP jackpot variation or SP loss variation), select a sub variation pattern that performs SP reach, and start the variation production corresponding to that sub variation pattern. Set the command to the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable device control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub fluctuation pattern. A special figure variation effect is realized. Note that the processing flow for realizing such performances is basically the same for other performances such as jackpot game performances, customer waiting performances, look-ahead performances, and so-called preview performances accompanying the fluctuations.

7. Characteristics of Pachinko game machine PY1 Characteristics of Pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained in detail below. Incidentally, one of the features of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is the pre-read performance.

First, the configuration of the game board unit YU in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 30, the game board unit YU has a belly button lamp 46 (an example of a "first light emitting section" or "specific light emitting section") that can emit light in various colors behind the first starting winning device 11D. It is equipped with The light emitted from the heso lamp 46 is emitted forward through a transparent synthetic resin member that constitutes the first starting winning device 11D. Therefore, when the belly button lamp 46 emits light, the location where the first starting prize winning device 11D is placed appears to be shining from the player's perspective.

Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a chance lamp 48 (an example of a "second light emitting section") near the vertical center of the left game area 6A and on the rear side of the game board 1. The chance lamp 48 is decorated with the character ``chance'' on the front side, and has a plurality of LEDs arranged along the periphery. Since the game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin member, the chance lamp 48 is visible to the player.

The heso lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 are connected to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. 31. That is, lighting control of the belly button lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 is performed by the production control microcomputer 121 via the lamp control circuit 151. The belly button lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 are included in the various lamps SL along with the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54.

Next, a jackpot game that can be executed by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 101 can execute various jackpot games (jackpot games 1 to 4) shown in the jackpot game control table of FIG. 32.

As shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot symbol type is "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol It is possible to determine either one of the symbols 2 and 2. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol 1" at a rate of 60% and the "jackpot symbol 2" at a rate of 40%. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot symbol 3 is the jackpot symbol 3 or the jackpot symbol 4 in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special symbol 2 determination process (the special symbol determination process based on winning in the second starting opening 12). It is possible to determine whether More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol 3" at a rate of 60% and the "jackpot symbol 4" at a rate of 40%.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a jackpot game according to the determined type of jackpot symbol. Specifically, in the "jackpot game 1" that is executed when "jackpot symbol 1" is determined, and the "jackpot game 2" that is executed when "jackpot symbol 2" is determined, the round game is performed 10 times. From 1R to 4R, the first prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 10R, the first prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The grand prize opening 14 is opened. From 5R to 10R of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first jackpot 14 is extremely short, and realistically, it is a round in which winning in the first jackpot 14 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10, the actual number of round games is 4.

In addition, in the "jackpot game 3" that is executed when "jackpot symbol 3" is determined, and the "jackpot game 4" that is executed when "jackpot symbol 4" is determined, the round game is played 10 times. It will be done. Then, in all from 1R to 10R, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. That is, in this jackpot game, both the total number of round games and the actual number of round games are 10 times.

Therefore, "Jackpot Game 3" or "Jackpot Game 4" where the actual number of round games is 10 times is "Jackpot Game 1" or "Jackpot Game 2" where the actual number of round games is 4 times. It can be said that it is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player, and the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 3" or "jackpot game 4" is executed is the same as the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" is executed. This can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the jackpot game, regardless of whether any of the jackpot games "jackpot game 1", "jackpot game 2", "jackpot game 3", and "jackpot game 4" is executed. Set to short time state (high base state). In addition, when a jackpot game such as "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 3" is executed. When any jackpot game of "Game 4" is executed, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal probability state. In other words, after "Jackpot Game 1" or "Jackpot Game 3", control is performed to a high probability high base gaming state (high probability state and time saving state), and after "Jackpot Game 2" or "Jackpot Game 4", Control to a low probability high base gaming state (normal probability state and time saving state).

In this form, if you win a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability high base gaming state according to the end of the jackpot game (referred to as a probability variable jackpot), the final stop of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 in the variable production As a mode, a double number of odd numbered symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, 7 symbols, or 9 symbols) may be displayed. On the other hand, if you win a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability high base gaming state according to the end of the jackpot game (referred to as a time-saving jackpot), as the final stop mode of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the fluctuating production. , a zero number of even numbered symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, or 8 symbols) is displayed.

In this embodiment, the "high probability high base game state" can continue until the next big win game is executed. On the other hand, the "low probability high base game state" can continue until the number of times the special chart is displayed variably reaches 100 times (a predetermined upper limit number of times it is executed).

Therefore, "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" in which a high probability state is set after that is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" in which a high probability state is not set after that. It can be said that this is a jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" is executed. I can say it.

Incidentally, the jackpot gaming state can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. Further, the "high probability high base gaming state" which is one of the high probability states can be said to be a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the "low probability high base gaming state" which is one of the normal probability states. In this specification, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be referred to as an advantageous gaming state or an advantageous state.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) will be explained. The game control microcomputer 101 determines the special pattern 1 variation pattern using the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 in the low certainty non-time saving state.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines the jackpot determination result, the reach determination result, and the special symbol variation performed in the special symbol 1 determination process in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process when the low-accuracy, non-time-saving state is set. The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined based on the pattern random number. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination, it selects any of "THP001," "THP002," or "THP003" as the special figure 1 variation pattern. It is possible to determine whether Which special figure 1 variation pattern is determined is determined by the special figure variation pattern random number. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 33. Note that the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure fluctuation pattern can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. This also applies to special figure fluctuation patterns other than "THP001" to "THP003".

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot determination is a loss and the result of the reach determination is "reach", the game control microcomputer 101 sets "THP021" and "THP022" as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. , or “THP023”.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot determination is a loss and the result of the reach determination is "no reach", the game control microcomputer 101 selects "THP031" and "THP032" as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. , or “THP033”. Which of these three types of special figure 1 fluctuation patterns is determined depends on the distribution rate depending on the number of special figure 1 reservations. Specifically, when the number of special symbols 1 reserved is 0 to 2, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a relatively long special symbol fluctuation time is likely to be determined, and when the number of special symbols 1 reserved is 3 to 4, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is likely to be determined. In this case, it is easy to determine a special pattern variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is relatively short.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP001" is a variation (battle jackpot variation) that develops from N reach to battle reach (a type of SP reach) and a victory performance (success performance) is performed. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP021" is a variation (battle loss variation) in which N reach develops into battle reach and a defeat effect (failure effect) is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP002" is a variation (story jackpot variation) in which N reach develops into story reach (a type of SP reach) and a successful performance is performed. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP022" is a variation (story loss variation) that develops from N reach to story reach and a failure effect is performed. In this embodiment, the selection ratios of Battle Reach and Story Reach are the same in the case of a jackpot win, and the same selection ratios of Battle Reach and Story Reach in the case of a loss.

Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP003" is an N jackpot variation in which N reach is performed but SP reach (battle reach or story reach) is not performed. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP023" is an N loss variation in which N reach is performed but SP reach (battle reach or story reach) is not performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP031" is a "normal A loss variation" in which the variation effect ends in 13 seconds without the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming reach, and "THP032" is the production symbol EZ1 , EZ2, EZ3 is a "normal B loss variation" in which the variation effect ends in 8 seconds without becoming a reach, and "THP033" is a variation effect that ends in 4 seconds without the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 becoming a reach. This is the "normal C loss variation" that ends at . In addition, reach is a state in which there is only one remaining performance symbol that is being variably displayed among multiple performance symbols, and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state (for example, a state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols that indicates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).

In this form, SP reach such as battle reach and story reach is executed after N reach, and N reach is executed when the normal variation is executed and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 become reach state (reach state). (Refer to the column of production flow of special figure variation production in Fig. 33).

Here, the battle reach (an example of the first specific effect) is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. Battle reach has a win/loss branch, and branches into a victory performance (success performance) in which an ally character wins against an enemy character, or a defeat performance (failure performance) in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character. The victory performance (success performance) functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has won a jackpot. The defeat performance (failure performance) functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has not won the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, in the battle reach, first, an image or the like indicating that an ally character and an enemy character will battle from now on is displayed on the display unit 50a (FIG. 34(A)). Then, an image showing a battle between the friendly character and the enemy character is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown). Before the win/lose branch, an image showing that the ally character attacks the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 34(B)). In the win-lose branch, if the battle reach is executed based on the battle jackpot fluctuation (see Figure 33), the ally character wins over the enemy character as a success effect (winning effect) that suggests winning the jackpot. A winning image (including an image of the ally character being happy and a background image for success G80) indicating this is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 suggest a jackpot win. The screen is stopped and displayed as a "Zero" (Fig. 34(C)). On the other hand, in the case of a battle reach executed based on the battle loss fluctuation, a defeat image showing that the ally character was defeated by the counter of the enemy character ( (including an image in which the ally character is sad and a background image for failure G81) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the "reach loss eye" indicating a loss. (FIG. 34(D)).

Furthermore, the story reach (an example of the second specific performance) is a reach performance that shows a story related to the work that is the motif of this pachinko gaming machine PY1. There is a winning or losing branch in the story reach, which branches into a successful performance where the story ends with a good ending, or a failed performance where the story ends with a bad ending. The success performance in Story Reach, like the success performance in Battle Reach, functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has won the jackpot. Similar to the failure performance in Battle Reach, the failure performance in Story Reach functions as a performance that suggests to the player that he has not won the jackpot.

As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the story reach, images etc. showing the ally characters and heroine appearing in the story are first displayed on the display unit 50a (FIG. 35(A)). The production shown in FIG. 35(A) functions as a production that suggests the start of the story reach. Then, images that follow the story are displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 35(B)). The story reach of this form is a story in which an ally character searches for a heroine. In the win-lose branch, if the story reach is executed based on the story jackpot fluctuation (see Figure 33), it is a successful performance (winning performance) that suggests that the heroine has won the jackpot, and it indicates that the heroine is happy. The success image (including the image of the heroine being happy and the background image for success G80) is displayed on the display section 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are "Zero" which suggests jackpot winning. ” is stopped and displayed (FIG. 35(C)). On the other hand, if the story reach is executed based on the story loss fluctuation, a failure image indicating that the heroine is sad (an image of the heroine being sad) is used as a failure effect that suggests a loss (loss effect). 35 (D )).

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 displays production images on the display unit 50a in each production (normal variation, N reach, SP reach, etc.) constituting the special figure variation production, pre-read production, etc., and also displays the production image. Depending on the situation, a light emission effect using various lamps SL (including the belly button lamp 46 and a chance lamp 48), a sound effect using the speaker 52, a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58, and an input device ( It is possible to perform operations and effects using the normal button 40 and special button 41).

Next, the look-ahead determination of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) will be explained. In the low certainty non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 specifies the start winning command related to the special drawing 1 using the special drawing 1 pre-reading determination table shown in FIG.

When the game control microcomputer 101 is set to the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, in the first pre-reading judgment (pre-reading judgment of special drawing 1), the special symbol random number obtained by the starting prize is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment. It is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number is determined to which special symbol fluctuation pattern by the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, and the start winning command is specified based on the results of these determinations. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 101 selects "SC001" as the starting winning command when it determines that a "battle jackpot fluctuation" is scheduled, and determines that a "story jackpot fluctuation" is scheduled. Sometimes, "SC002" is selected as the starting winning command, and when it is determined that "N jackpot fluctuation" is planned, "SC003" is selected as the starting winning command. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 selects "SC011" as the starting winning command when it determines that the "battle loss fluctuation" is scheduled, and selects "SC012" as the starting winning command when it determines that the "story losing fluctuation" is scheduled. However, when it is determined that the schedule is for "N loss variation", "SC013" is selected as the starting winning command, and when it is determined that the schedule is for "normal losing variation", "SC014" is selected as the starting winning command.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment changes the display mode of the pending display (the pending icon HA, the icon TA) to a special display mode different from the normal display mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the above-described pre-reading determination. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that is displayed in . In this embodiment, the hold display is a circular icon, and the hold change performance is a performance that changes the display color of the hold display. The pachinko game machine PY1 can display a white pending display as a pending display in a normal display mode, and can display a blue pending display or a red pending display as a pending display in a special display mode. The pending icon HA and the icon TA are displayed when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) and when the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation This is done when a start command or special map 2 variation start command) is received. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 starts displaying the pending icon HA at the time of starting winning, shifts displaying the pending icon HA at the start of variation, or ends displaying the icon TA. For display control of the pending icon HA and the icon TA, publicly known techniques can be adopted as appropriate.

FIG. 37 is a lottery table for pending change effects. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the start winning command from the game control microcomputer 101, it performs a lottery for execution of the pending change performance based on the analysis result of the start winning command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the production control microcomputer 121 determines that if the result of the pre-reading determination is a jackpot change (that is, the starting winning command received from the gaming control microcomputer 101 is "SC001" or "SC002"). , "SC003"), at a rate of 40%, it is decided to execute a hold change effect in which the final display mode of the hold display is red, and at a rate of 35%, the final display mode of the hold display is changed to red. It is decided to execute a pending change effect in which the aspect is blue, and it is decided not to perform a pending change effect at a rate of 25%. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with a reach (in other words, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is one of "SC011", "SC012", and "SC013") ), at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute a hold change effect in which the final display mode of the hold display is red, and at a rate of 30%, a hold change effect is executed in which the final display mode of the hold display is blue. At a rate of 60%, it is decided not to perform the pending change effect. In this embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with no reach (that is, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "SC014"), a pending change performance is executed. I have decided not to do so. Even if the result of the pre-reading determination is a loss variation without reaching, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change performance may be executed.

In this manner, in the present embodiment, the pending change performance is more likely to be executed when the pre-read determination result is a jackpot than when the result is a loss. Therefore, the pending change performance functions as a performance that suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is high. In addition, in this form, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot, the pending change effect (red pending effect) in which the final display mode is red is better than the pending change effect (blue pending effect) in which the final display mode is blue. ), and if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss, the pending change effect (red pending effect) in which the final display mode is red is more likely to be executed than the pending change effect (blue pending effect) in which the final display mode is blue. It is more difficult to execute than (deferred performance). Therefore, the red pending performance functions as a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation level is higher than the blue pending performance.

When it is determined in the holding change performance execution lottery to execute the hold change performance, a lottery is performed for the execution timing of the hold change performance (timing of the hold change). The timing of the pending change includes three times: at the start winning time, at the time of shift display, and during the change. The time of starting winning is when the starting winning that becomes a trigger for execution of the pending change effect occurs. The shift display time is when the display position of the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold as a trigger for executing the hold change performance is changed to another hold icon display area 50d (when the hold display is shifted displayed). The said "during fluctuation" means that a fluctuation performance is being executed based on the special figure reservation as an execution trigger of the reservation change performance. In addition, in this specification, the special figure reservation as an execution opportunity of a look-ahead performance (including a reservation change performance) is called target reservation.

In this embodiment, the lottery for timing of reservation change is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 38. As shown in FIG. 38, the lottery for the timing of the hold change is performed based on the final display mode of the hold display and the number of hold wins that triggered the execution of the hold change effect.

Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines to perform a red reservation performance as a reservation change performance, and when the special figure reservation that triggers the execution of this red reservation performance occurs as the fourth special figure reservation, As the execution timing of the pending change performance, the starting winning time is selected at a rate of 25%, the time of shift display is selected at a rate of 50%, and the period during the fluctuation is selected at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the red hold effect occurs as the third special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 35% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the shift display time is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 40%, and select at a rate of 25% during the fluctuation. In addition, if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the red hold effect occurs as the second special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a 50% rate as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the shift display time is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 25%, and select at a rate of 25% during the fluctuation. In addition, if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the red hold effect occurs as the first special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 60% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the period during the fluctuation is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 40% and do not select shift display.

On the other hand, if it is decided to perform a blue hold effect as a hold change effect, and if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of this blue hold change occurs as the fourth special figure hold, then the execution timing of the hold change effect. As a result, the starting winning time is selected at a rate of 10%, the shift display time is selected at a rate of 60%, and the period during the fluctuation is selected at a rate of 30%. In addition, if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the blue hold effect occurs as the third special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 20% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the time of shift display is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 50%, and select at a rate of 30% during the fluctuation. In addition, if the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the blue hold effect occurs as the second special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 30% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the shift display time is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 40%, and select at a rate of 30% during the change. In addition, when the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the blue hold effect occurs as the first special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 40% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the period during the fluctuation is selected as the execution timing of the hold change effect. Select at a rate of 60% and do not select shift display.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the execution timing of "start winning" is more likely to be selected for the red pending effect than for the blue held effect. As a result, the player is more likely to have expectations that the red hold effect will be executed at the time of starting winning, and the interest in the game is improved.

Next, the lottery for the heso lamp lighting effect will be explained based on FIG. 39. When the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment executes the hold change effect, it is possible to execute the heel lamp light emitting effect in which the belly button lamp 46 emits light in the same color (that is, red or blue) as the hold display in the special display mode. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a belly button light emission performance in conjunction with a hold change performance. That is, when displaying the hold display in the special display mode (red hold display or blue hold display), the heel lamp 46 may be emitted in the same color as the hold display in the special display mode.

FIG. 39 is a lottery table for the heso lamp lighting effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the pending change effect, it performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the belly button light emission effect based on the table shown in FIG. If the result of the look-ahead judgment related to the target hold of the hold change effect is a jackpot change (start winning command “SC001”, “SC002”, or “SC003”), the belly button light emission effect will be executed at a rate of 98%. It is decided that the heso lamp light emission effect will not be executed at a rate of 2%. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead judgment related to the target reservation of the reservation change performance is a loss variation with reach (start winning command "SC011", "SC012", or "SC013"), at a rate of 90%, It is decided to execute the heso lamp light emission effect, and it is decided not to execute the heso lamp light emission effect at a rate of 10%.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot or a loss with a reach, when the pending change effect is executed, there is an extremely high probability that the belly button light emission effect will be executed in conjunction. It has become. This makes the execution of the pending change performance even more exciting. It should be noted that the probability that the belly button light emitting effect is not linked when executing the pending change effect is higher when the player loses than when winning the jackpot. Therefore, when both the pending change effect and the belly button lamp light emission effect are executed, you can expect to win the jackpot more than when the pending change effect is executed and the belly button lamp emission effect is not executed. ing.

Next, the lottery for the chance lamp lighting effect will be explained based on FIGS. 40 and 41. The pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a chance lamp light emission effect in which the chance lamp 48 is made to emit light as a prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch determination. The light emission colors of the chance lamp 48 in the chance lamp light emission effect include two colors: yellow and purple. In addition, light emission modes other than the emission color (specifically, modes related to the order of light emission) include two types: simultaneous lighting and sequential lighting.

Simultaneous lighting is a light emission mode in which all of the plurality of LEDs included in the chance lamp 48 are lit at once, as shown in FIGS. 41(A) and 41(B). On the other hand, sequential lighting refers to lighting the plurality of LEDs included in the chance lamp 48 in order clockwise from the lowest LED, as shown in FIGS. 41(A), (C), (D), and (E). This is a light emitting mode in which light is emitted so that the number of LEDs that are connected increases. After the state shown in FIG. 41(E) is achieved, the state is returned to the state shown in FIG. 41(A), and the light emission control is repeated in the order of FIG. 41(C)→FIG. 41(D)→FIG. 41(E). In other words, when the lights are turned on sequentially, the light turns on clockwise as follows: Each LED of the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit light repeatedly in a circular motion. Sequential lighting is also called sequential lighting. Sequential lighting corresponds to the first light emission mode of the chance lamp 48, and simultaneous lighting corresponds to the second mode.

FIG. 40 is a lottery table for the chance lamp lighting effect. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the start winning command from the game control microcomputer 101, it performs a lottery for executing the chance lamp light emission performance based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 determines that if the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the starting winning command received from the game controlling microcomputer 101 changes to a jackpot (that is, the received starting winning command is "SC001" or "SC002"). , or if it is "SC003"), at a rate of 28%, it is decided to execute a chance lamp light emission effect with a light emission color of "purple" and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 25%, a chance lamp light emission effect of "yellow" is executed. It was decided to perform the chance lamp lighting effect with the emission color and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 20%, it was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the emission color of "purple" and "all at once", At a rate of 17%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp light emission effect with the emission color of "yellow" and "all at once", and at a rate of 10%, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp emission effect. When the chance lamp light emission effect is not performed, each LED of the chance lamp 48 continues to be turned off (unlit state).

On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the starting winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is a loss variation with reach (in other words, the received starting winning command is "SC011", "SC012", or " SC013), the production control microcomputer 121 decides to execute the chance lamp emission production with the emission color of "purple" and "sequential lighting" at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 3%, It has been decided to perform a chance lamp lighting effect with a ``yellow'' emission color and ``sequential lighting'', and at a rate of 7%, a chance lamp lighting effect will be executed with a ``purple'' emission color and ``all at once lighting''. At 9% of the time, it was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the emission color of "yellow" and "all at once", and at a rate of 80%, it was decided not to execute the chance lamp lighting effect. do. In this embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with no reach (that is, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "SC014"), the chance lamp lighting effect is executed. I have decided not to implement it. Even if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with no reach, the chance lamp light emission effect may be executed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the chance lamp lighting performance is more likely to be executed when the pre-read determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. Therefore, the chance lamp light emission performance functions as a performance that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a jackpot, sequential lighting is more likely to be selected than simultaneous lighting, and if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss, simultaneous lighting is more likely than sequential lighting. is likely to be selected. Therefore, the chance lamp light emission performance in which the players are turned on sequentially functions as a performance that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the chance lamp light emission performance in which the players turn on the chance lamps all at once. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a jackpot, the purple luminescent color is more likely to be selected than the yellow light-emitting color, regardless of whether the lights are turned on sequentially or all at once, and the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss. In some cases, yellow light emission color is more likely to be selected than purple light emission color, whether the lights are turned on sequentially or all at once. Therefore, the chance lamp lighting effect in which the purple colors are lit sequentially functions as a presentation that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the successive yellow chance lamp emission effect, and the chance lamp lighting effect in which the purple color lights up simultaneously is It functions as a presentation that suggests that there is a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the chance lamp lighting effect where all yellow lights are lit all at once.

Here, a comparison will be made between the belly button lamp light emission effect and the chance lamp light emission effect. First, the belly button light emission effect is executed with an extremely high probability when the pending change effect is executed (see FIG. 39). Therefore, the belly button light emission effect, like the pending change effect, is a effect that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher if it is executed than if it is not executed. In addition, in the belly button lamp lighting performance, the belly button lamp 46 emits light in the same color as the display color of the pending display in the hold change performance, so the belly button lamp lighting performance that emits red light has a higher jackpot expectation than the belly button lamp lighting performance that emits blue light. The performance suggests that it is expensive.

In this embodiment, the pending change effect and the belly button light emission effect (which are executed in conjunction with each other when the pending change effect is executed) have a probability of approximately 25% not being executed if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a jackpot change. The probability of execution is relatively high at about 40% when the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation (see FIG. 37). On the other hand, the chance lamp lighting effect has a relatively low probability of 10% that it will not be executed if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a jackpot variation, and the probability that it will not be executed if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss variation is 20%. % (see Figure 40). In other words, in this embodiment, the chance lamp lighting performance is extremely easy to perform when a jackpot is won, and extremely difficult to perform when a jackpot is not won, compared to the pending change performance and the navel lamp lighting performance. ing. Therefore, it can be said that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the chance lamp light emission effect is executed than when the pending change effect and the navel lamp emission effect are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the hold change effect, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss change, blue hold (blue hold display) is selected as the final display mode of the hold display at a rate of 30%, and red hold (red hold display) is selected as the final display mode of the hold display. Pending display) is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot fluctuation, blue reservation is selected at a rate of 35% and red reservation is selected at a rate of 40% as the final display mode of the reservation display (see FIG. 37). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the blue hold effect is executed with a certain high probability, and similarly, as the belly button light emission effect that is almost always executed in conjunction with the hold change effect, the blue light is emitted. The heso lamp lighting effect is executed with a certain high probability. On the other hand, in the chance lamp lighting effect, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss fluctuation, the percentage of sequential lighting is 4% (in detail, the percentage of sequential lighting of purple is 1%, and the percentage of sequential lighting of yellow is 3%) The simultaneous lighting is executed at a rate of 16% (in detail, simultaneous lighting of purple is executed at a rate of 7%, and simultaneous lighting of yellow is executed at a rate of 9%). On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot fluctuation, sequential lighting is executed at a rate of 53% (in detail, sequential lighting of purple is executed at a rate of 28%, sequential lighting of yellow is executed at a rate of 25%), and all lights are lit all at once. is executed at a rate of 37% (in detail, simultaneous lighting of purple is executed at a rate of 20%, and simultaneous lighting of yellow is executed at a rate of 17%) (see FIG. 40). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the chance lamp light emission effect is executed, sequential lighting is executed with a relatively high probability. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that a higher jackpot expectation level is more likely to be suggested when the chance lamp light emission effect is executed than when the hold change effect and the navel lamp emission effect are executed. It should be noted that if the chance lamp lighting performance can be made to be a performance that tends to suggest a higher jackpot expectation than the navel lamp lighting performance, the execution probability of each performance and the distribution rate of the performance mode can be changed as appropriate.

Next, an example of execution of a characteristic performance in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 42 to 46. These performance execution examples are realized by the above configuration.

FIG. 42 shows an example of performance execution in the case where the winning in the first starting hole 11, which is the trigger for executing the pre-reading performance, occurs as the fourth special figure 1 pending, and the target is held (as the trigger for executing the pre-reading performance). The position of special map reservation) is reservation 4 (4th reservation), reservation 3 (3rd reservation), reservation 2 (2nd reservation), reservation 1 (1st reservation), and the relevant change (Special figure fluctuation based on target reservation) shows the execution status of the effect as it changes.

In production execution examples 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 42, based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 reservation occurs, a red reservation performance is executed as a reservation change performance, and a navel lamp lighting performance and a chance lamp lighting performance are executed. This is an example of a case where it is decided not to execute. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the reservation change, as shown in production execution example 1, the production control microcomputer 121 displays red reservation as a reservation display representing the fourth special figure 1 reservation, Thereafter, the red reservation is continued to be displayed (that is, the red reservation is displayed as the reservation icon HA indicating the third, second, and first special symbol 1 reservation and the changing icon TA).

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the pending change, for example, as shown in production execution example 2, the production control microcomputer 121 displays a pending display indicating that the 4th and 3rd special symbols 1 are pending. Normal reservation is displayed as , and when the shift display is shifted to the reservation display representing the second special drawing 1 reservation, it is changed to red reservation, and thereafter, red reservation is continued to be displayed. If you select "When displaying a shift" as the timing of the hold change, at which timing will the hold change be performed: when the shift is displayed to hold 3, when the shift is displayed to hold 2, or when the shift is displayed to hold 1? shall be decided by lottery. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "currently changing" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in production execution example 1, the production control microcomputer 121 displays a pending display indicating that the 4th to 1st special figure 1 is pending. Displays normal hold and changes to red hold during the change. In addition, in the effect execution examples 1 to 3, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 regardless of the position of the target hold from ``hold 4'' to ``the variation.''

In production execution examples 4 to 6 shown in FIG. 42, a red holding effect is executed as a holding change effect based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 holding occurs, and in conjunction with this, a belly button light emission effect ( Specifically, this is an example where it is determined that a belly button lamp light emission effect in which the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red is executed, and a chance lamp light emission effect is not executed. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the reservation change, as shown in production execution example 4, the production control microcomputer 121 displays red reservation as a reservation display representing the fourth special figure 1 reservation, When displaying this red hold, a belly button light emitting effect is performed in which the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red. From then on, the red pending display and the red lit belly button light emitting effect will continue until the special symbol variation based on the target pending ends.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the pending change, for example, as shown in production execution example 5, the production control microcomputer 121 displays a pending display indicating that the 4th and 3rd special symbols 1 are pending. Normal hold is displayed as , and the belly button lamp 46 is turned off during this period. Then, when the hold display representing the second special drawing 1 hold is shifted to the hold display, it is changed to red hold and the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red. From then on, the red pending display and the red-lit belly button light emitting effect will continue until the special symbol variation based on the target pending ends. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "during the change" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in production execution example 6, the production control microcomputer 121 displays a pending display indicating that the 4th to 1st special figure 1 is pending. Normal hold is displayed, and the belly button lamp 46 is turned off during this time. Then, during the change, it is changed to red hold, and at the time of this change, the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red. In addition, in the production execution examples 4 to 6, the production control microcomputer 121 turns off the chance lamp 48 regardless of the position of the target pending from "Pending 4" to "the variation".

Here, FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the display unit 50a, the belly button lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning of the production execution example 4 shown in FIG. 42. As shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B), in production execution example 4, a red pending icon is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the fourth special drawing 1 pending in response to winning at the first starting port 11. HA is displayed and the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red. The chance lamp 48 remains off. In this manner, in this embodiment, since the navel lamp 46 lights up when the hold change performance is executed, it is possible to stimulate expectations for a jackpot win and improve the game's interest, rather than simply performing the hold change performance.

In addition, in production execution examples 7 and 8 shown in FIG. 42, based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 reservation occurs, the chance lamp light emission effect is executed without executing the pending change effect and the belly button light emission effect. This is an example of a case where it is determined that When the production control microcomputer 121 determines to perform a chance lamp emission production with a yellow luminescent color and a lighting mode of simultaneous lighting, the production control microcomputer 121 determines the timing when the fourth special figure 1 is put on hold, as shown in Production Execution Example 7. Then, the chance lamps 48 are turned on in a yellow light-emitting mode in which they are turned on all at once. This chance lamp light emission effect continues until the special symbol variation based on target reservation ends. In addition, in this performance execution example 7, the normal hold continues to be displayed as the hold display corresponding to the target hold, and the belly button lamp 46 is turned off regardless of the position of the target hold from "Hold 4" to "The relevant variation". Continue to do so.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines to perform a chance lamp emission production with a yellow luminescent color and a sequential lighting mode, the fourth special figure 1 is put on hold as shown in production execution example 8. At this timing, the chance lamps 48 are turned on in a yellow light-emitting manner in which they are turned on sequentially. This chance lamp light emission effect continues until the special symbol variation based on target reservation ends. In addition, in this performance execution example 8, the normal hold continues to be displayed as the hold display corresponding to the target hold, and the belly button lamp 46 is turned off regardless of the position of the target hold from "Hold 4" to "The relevant variation". Continue to do so.

Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the display unit 50a, the belly button lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning in the production execution example 8 shown in FIG. 42. As shown in FIGS. 44(A) and 44(B), in production execution example 8, in response to winning in the first starting slot 11, the normal display mode is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the fourth special drawing 1 pending. The hold icon HA is displayed, and the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit yellow light in a sequential lighting manner. The heso lamp 46 remains off. In this way, in this embodiment, the chance lamp 48 may emit light even if the pending change effect or the belly button lamp light emission effect is not executed, so when the chance lamp 48 emits light, it is possible to make the player expect to win a jackpot. It is expected that interest in gaming will increase.

In addition, production execution examples 9 to 10 shown in FIG. 42 are based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 suspension occurs, a suspension change production in which the final display mode is red suspension, a belly button light emission production, and a chance. This is an example of a case where it is decided to perform a lamp lighting effect. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the reservation change, as shown in production execution example 9, the production control microcomputer 121 displays red reservation as a reservation display representing the fourth special figure 1 reservation, When displaying this red hold, a belly button light emission effect is performed in which the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a chance lamp light emission performance in which the chance lamps 48 are caused to emit light in a purple color and in a lighting mode in which they are lit all at once, at the same time as the belly button lamp light emission performance. From then on, until the special symbol variation based on the target reservation is completed, the display of red reservation, the red belly button light emission effect, and the purple chance lamp light emission effect that are lit all at once are continued.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in Production Execution Example 10, the production control microcomputer 121 displays normal pending as a pending display representing the fourth special figure 1 pending. At the same time, when displaying this normal hold, a chance lamp light emitting effect is executed in which the chance lamp 48 is made to emit light in a purple color and in a sequential lighting mode. At this point, the heso lamp 46 is still off. For example, while displaying the normal hold up to the hold display representing the third special figure 1 hold, the navel lamp 46 is turned off, and when the shift display is shifted to the hold display representing the second special figure 1 hold, the red At the same time, a belly button lamp light emission effect is executed to change the status to hold and light up the belly button lamp 46 in red. From then on, the red pending display and the red-lit belly button light emitting effect will continue until the special symbol variation based on the target pending ends. In addition, the chance lamp light-emitting effect that is purple and sequentially lit is continuously executed from the time of the starting winning related to the fourth special drawing 1 pending until the end of the special drawing variation based on the starting winning.

Here, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the display section 50a, the belly button lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning of the production execution example 9 shown in FIG. 42. As shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B), in production execution example 9, in response to winning at the first start opening 11, a red display color is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the fourth special drawing 1 pending. At the same time, the hold icon HA is displayed, the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red, and the chance lamp 48 is lit in purple and in a simultaneous lighting mode. In this way, in this embodiment, when a starting prize is won, not only the pending change effect and the belly button lamp light emission effect are executed, but also the chance lamp 48 (a lamp different from the belly button lamp 46) may emit light, so that depending on the starting prize, Compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of lamp that can emit light, expectations for a jackpot can be greatly stimulated, and an improvement in game interest can be expected.

Further, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the operations of the display section 50a, the belly button lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 in the performance execution example 10 shown in FIG. 42. As shown in FIGS. 46(A) and 46(B), in production execution example 10, in response to winning at the first start opening 11, the normal display mode is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the fourth special drawing 1 pending. The hold icon HA is displayed, and the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit light in a purple color and in a sequential lighting mode. At this point, the heso lamp 46 remains off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 46(B) and (C), when shifting the display to the holding display corresponding to the second special drawing 1 holding, the holding display corresponding to the target holding is changed to red holding, and The heso lamp 46 is turned on in red. In this way, in this embodiment, the chance lamp 48 is lit at the time of starting winning, but even if the pending change performance is not executed, the pending change effect is displayed at a timing other than the starting winning, such as during shift display or during the fluctuation. The effect may be executed, and in this case, the belly button light emission effect is also almost executed in conjunction with the pending change effect. Therefore, even if the belly button lamp 46 does not emit light at the time of starting winning, it will emit light at another timing, and by suggesting a relatively high level of jackpot expectation due to the belly button lamp light emission effect and the pending change effect, the player's expectations for the jackpot are increased. It is possible to further increase the level of interest, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will increase.

8. Effects of the Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting units (belly button lamp 46 and chance lamp 48) emit light in response to winning in the first starting port 11. ) (see FIG. 42), it is possible to make the player interested in which light emitting part emits light, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the chance lamp 48 emits light in response to a winning at the first starting port 11, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the belly button lamp 46 emits light. (See FIGS. 37, 39, and 40). Therefore, when the chance lamp 48 emits light, the player's sense of anticipation can be greatly stimulated, and the player's interest in the game can be expected to improve.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 can clearly indicate the level of expectation by different emitted light colors, while the chance lamp 48 uses a different method than the belly button lamp 46 (e.g., the light emitting mode other than the light emitting color). (difference) indicates the level of expectation (see Figures 40 and 41). Therefore, in both cases, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations and increase the enjoyment of the game compared to a configuration in which the level of expectation is indicated only by the color of the emitted light.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the belly button lamp 46, which can emit light when a prize is won in the first starting opening 11, is activated at times other than the starting winning time, such as when the shift display of the pending display or during special figure fluctuation based on the target holding. It may emit light depending on the timing depending on the change in the display mode of the hold display (see example 5 of performance execution in FIG. 42). Therefore, it is possible to surprise the players, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the belly button lamp 46 emits light at a timing other than the start winning time, the belly button lamp 46 lights up in a color corresponding to the display color of the pending display after the change, so that the pending display and the belly button lamp 46 are different from each other. The relevance of the game can be easily conveyed to the players, the excitement of the performance can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 may emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the hold display related to the hold change effect from the time of start winning (see effect execution example 4 in FIG. 42). , the relationship between the belly button lamp 46 and the pending display is further enhanced, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting parts are provided as light emitting parts that can indicate the expectation level of a jackpot by different emitting colors and can emit light in response to winnings in the first starting opening 11. (see FIGS. 37, 39, and 40) (see FIGS. 37, 39, and 40), the player can be interested in which light emitting part emits light in which color, and the game It is expected that interest will increase.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 may emit light in different colors depending on a winning in the first starting port 11 (effect execution example 9 in FIG. 42). ), it is expected that the variety of performances will be improved and the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the light emitting color of the belly button lamp 46 that can emit light in response to a winning in the first starting port 11 corresponds to the display color of the hold display related to the hold change effect, so the belly button lamp The relevance of the effect between 46 and the hold display is enhanced. In addition, since the emitted light color of the chance lamp 48 does not correspond to the display color of the hold display, even if the display color of the hold display is a color with low expectations, depending on the emitted color of the chance lamp 48, it may be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. It can create a sense of expectation. As a result, it is expected that interest in gaming will increase.

9. Modifications of the First Embodiment Modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment (including the second embodiment and the third embodiment) will be described below. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Further, the technical features in the above embodiments and the modified examples described below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<Second embodiment>
The first feature of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is that when a story reach is performed as an SP reach, a lottery for executing a chance lamp lighting effect is performed based on a lottery table different from that when a battle reach is performed. This is different from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the embodiment. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. If the command is "SC001" or "SC003"), at a rate of 28%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the emission color of "purple" and "lighting up sequentially", and at a rate of 25%, It has been decided to perform a chance lamp lighting effect with a ``yellow'' emission color and ``sequential lighting'', and at a rate of 20%, a chance lamp lighting effect will be executed with a ``purple'' emission color and ``all at once lighting''. It was decided that at a rate of 17%, the chance lamp lighting effect would be performed with the emission color of "yellow" and "all at once", and at a rate of 10%, the chance lamp lighting effect would not be executed (chance lamp lighting effect). 48 in the off state). In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a battle loss variation or an N loss variation (that is, if the received starting winning command is "SC011" or "SC013"), at a rate of 1%, It has been decided to perform a chance lamp lighting effect with a "purple" emission color and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 3%, a chance lamp lighting effect will be executed with a "yellow" emission color and "sequential lighting". It was decided that at a rate of 7%, a chance lamp lighting effect would be executed with a light emission color of "purple" and "all at once", and at a rate of 9%, a light emission color of "yellow" and "all at once" would be executed. '', it is decided to execute the chance lamp light emission effect, and at a rate of 80%, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp emission effect (the chance lamp 48 is maintained in the off state). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when a battle reach is performed, or when an N reach is performed but does not develop into an SP reach, the chance lamp lighting effect that lights up sequentially is better than the chance lamp lighting effect that lights up all at once. Expectations for winning the jackpot are higher than the light-emitting display.

On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a story jackpot variation (that is, if the received starting winning command is "SC002"), the performance control microcomputer 121 will change the "purple" color at a rate of 20%. It was decided to perform the chance lamp lighting effect with the emitting color and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 17%, it was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the emitting color of "yellow" and "sequential lighting", At a rate of 28%, it was decided to perform a chance lamp lighting effect with a "purple" light emission color and "all at once", and at a 25% rate, a chance lamp light emission effect with a "yellow" light emission color and "all at once" was decided to be performed. It is decided to perform the light emitting effect, and it is decided not to perform the chance lamp light emitting effect at a rate of 10% (keep the chance lamp 48 in the off state). In addition, if the result of the pre-reading judgment is a story loss variation (that is, if the received starting winning command is "SC012"), the production control microcomputer 121 will emit light of "purple" and It was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with "sequential lighting", and it was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with "yellow" emission color and "sequential lighting" at a rate of 9%, and at a rate of 1%. At a rate of 3%, it was decided to perform a chance lamp lighting effect with a ``purple'' emission color and ``all at once'', and at a rate of 3%, a chance lamp emission effect with a ``yellow'' emission color and ``all at once lighting'' was decided. At a rate of 80%, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp light emission effect (keep the chance lamp 48 in the off state). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when a story reach is performed, the chance lamp light emission effect in which the players turn on all at once has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the chance lamp light emission effect in which the players turn on sequentially.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the chance lamp light emission effect that lights up sequentially is executed as a look-ahead effect, the battle reach is achieved in the variable effect based on the special symbol reservation that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect. When (an example of the first specific effect) is executed, the jackpot expectation level is higher than when the story reach (an example of the second specific effect) is executed. On the other hand, if a chance lamp lighting effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, the battle reach will be executed better if the story reach is executed in the variable effect based on the special map reservation that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect. Expectations for a jackpot are higher than expected. Therefore, when a chance lamp lighting effect is executed, there is a strong interest in whether Battle Reach or Story Reach will be executed in the variable effect based on the special figure reservation that triggered the execution of the chance lamp emission effect. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the role of sequentially lighting up the chance lamps 48 may be made to emit purple light, and the role of lighting them all at once may be made to be made to emit yellow light. In this case, the purple light emission corresponds to the first light emission mode of the chance lamp 48, and the yellow light emission corresponds to the second light emission mode.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 48 to 50. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the second This is different from the pachinko game machine of the embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined to execute a pending change effect in the execution lottery of a pending change effect based on a pre-read determination, the final display mode of the pending display is blue hold (blue hold display) and red hold. In addition to (red pending display), you may also select green pending (green pending display), and this green pending has a higher jackpot expectation than the blue pending, and a lower jackpot expectation than the red pending. shall be executed as follows. Further, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 can not only emit light in blue and red, but also in green.

In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect based on the result of the pre-read determination, the hold change scenario is drawn by lottery based on the table shown in FIG. 48. The pending change scenario defines the timing of pending changes. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when red reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the fourth special drawing 1 reservation, the scenario Select one from 01 to 04. Scenario 01 (distribution rate 25%) is a scenario in which red pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 02 (distribution rate 25%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed at the start of winning and changed to red pending when the shift to pending 3 is displayed. Scenario 03 (distribution rate 25%) displays blue hold at the start of winning, changes to green hold when shift to hold 3 is displayed, and further changes to red hold during the relevant change (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario. Scenario 04 (distribution rate 25%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning, changed to green hold when shift display to hold 3, and further changed to red hold during the fluctuation.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the red reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the third special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 05 to Select one of 07. Scenario 05 (distribution rate 34%) is a scenario in which red pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 06 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to red pending when shift display to pending 2 is displayed. Scenario 07 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold at the start of winning, changes to blue hold when shift to hold 2 is displayed, and further changes to red hold during the change (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when red reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the second special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 08 to Select one of 09. Scenario 08 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which red pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 09 (distribution rate 50%) displays normal hold at the start of winning, changes to green hold when shift to hold 1 is displayed, and further changes to red hold during the fluctuation (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when red reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the first special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 10 to Select one of 11. Scenario 10 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which red pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 11 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which blue pending is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to red pending during the fluctuation.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the green pending is selected as the final display mode of the pending display, and the target pending occurs as the fourth special figure 1 pending, scenarios 21 to Select one of 25. Scenario 21 (distribution rate 20%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 22 (distribution rate 20%) is a scenario in which blue reservation is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green reservation when shift display to reservation 3 is displayed. Scenario 23 (distribution rate 20%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green hold when shift display to hold 3 is displayed. Scenario 24 (distribution rate 20%) displays normal hold at the start of winning, changes to blue hold when the shift to hold 3 is displayed, and further changes to green hold during the change (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario. Scenario 25 (distribution rate 20%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green hold during the fluctuation.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the green pending is selected as the final display mode of the pending display, and the target pending occurs as the third special drawing 1 pending, scenarios 26 to Select one of 28. Scenario 26 (distribution rate 34%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed from the start winning. Scenario 27 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which blue hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green hold when shift display to hold 2 is displayed. Scenario 28 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold at the start of winning, changes to blue hold when the shift to hold 2 is displayed, and further changes to green hold during the change (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the green pending is selected as the final display mode of the pending display, and the target pending occurs as the second special drawing 1 pending, scenarios 29 to Select one of 31. Scenario 29 (distribution rate 34%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed from the start of winning. Scenario 30 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green hold when shift display to hold 1 is displayed. Scenario 31 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold at the start of winning, changes to blue hold when shift to hold 1 is displayed, and then changes to green hold during the relevant change (special symbol change related to target hold). This is a changing scenario. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when green reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the first special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 32 to Select one of 33. Scenario 32 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which green pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 33 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which blue pending is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to green pending during the fluctuation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when blue reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the fourth special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 41 to Select one of 43. Scenario 41 (distribution rate 34%) is a scenario in which blue pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 42 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to blue hold when shift display to hold 3 is displayed. Scenario 43 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which normal reservation is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to blue reservation during the fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation related to target reservation).

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when blue reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the third special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 44 to Select one of 45. Scenario 44 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which blue pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 45 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to blue hold when shift display to hold 2 is displayed. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when blue reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the second special drawing 1 reservation, scenarios 46 to Select one of 47. Scenario 46 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which blue pending is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 47 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changed to blue hold when shift display to hold 1 is displayed. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when blue reservation is selected as the final display mode of the reservation display, and when the target reservation occurs as the first special drawing 1 reservation, scenario 48 is executed. select. Scenario 48 (distribution rate 100%) is a scenario in which blue reservation is displayed from the time of starting winning.

Here, scenarios 02, 03, 06, 11, 22, 27, and 33 display a special display mode of pending display (blue pending, green pending, or red pending) from the time of starting winning, and This is a scenario in which a plurality of reservation changes occur before the special symbol fluctuation based on the target reservation ends, including the reservation change at the time of starting winning. When these scenarios are selected and it is decided to execute the heso lamp lighting effect (by lottery based on the table shown in FIG. 39), the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment further A lottery will be held to determine the color of the heso lamp light emitting display (referred to as the heso lamp light emitting display when winning a prize). Specifically, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. In some cases, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a jackpot fluctuation, "green" is selected at a rate of 70% and "blue" is selected at a rate of 30% as the emission color of the heel lamp 46 at the time of starting winning. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss variation with reach, "green" is selected at a rate of 30% as the emission color of the belly button lamp 46 at the time of starting winning, and "blue" is selected at a rate of 70%. select. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is further changed at a timing other than the starting winning time (during shift display, during the fluctuation), the belly button lamp 46 is made to emit light in the same color as the display mode after the change.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when scenario 02, 03, 06, 11, 22, 27, or 33 is selected as the pending change scenario, the display color of the pending display and the emitted light color of the belly button lamp 46 are different colors. This may happen. The expectation of a jackpot is higher when the emitted light color of the belly button lamp 46 at the time of starting winning is "green" than when it is "blue". Therefore, even if a blue reservation is displayed at the time of starting winning, if the belly button lamp 46 emits green light, it is possible to make the player aware that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the special prize based on the target reservation can be made. Since it is possible to expect the game to change to green hold or red hold before the change ends, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Here, an example of performance execution in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described based on FIG. 50. FIG. 50 shows an example of performance execution in a case where the winning of the first start opening 11, which is the trigger for the execution of the pre-read performance, occurs as the fourth special drawing 1 is held. Effect execution example 11 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 hold occurs, a hold change effect where the final display mode is red hold, a belly button light emission effect, and a purple and simultaneous lighting. This is an example of a case where it is decided to perform the chance lamp light emission effect. It is assumed that scenario 02 is selected in the lottery for the pending change scenario, and blue is selected in the lottery for the light emitting color of the heel lamp lighting effect at the time of winning. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays green hold on the display section 50a at the time of starting winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in blue, and lights the chance lamp 48 in purple and all at once. Then, when displaying the shift to the hold 3, the green hold is changed to the red hold, and the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red, which is the same color as the hold display. In this production example, at the time of starting winning, the pending display is displayed as green pending, but the navel lamp 46 is lit in blue, so the player may realize that he cannot expect much to win the jackpot, but the pending 3 When the shift to is displayed, red pending is displayed and the belly button lamp 46 lights up in red, so expectations for winning the jackpot are instantly heightened. Therefore, it is expected that interest in gaming will increase.

Furthermore, the effect execution example 12 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 is held, a hold change effect in which the final display mode is red hold, a heel lamp light emission effect, and a purple and simultaneous display. This is an example of a case where it is decided to execute a lighting chance lamp light emission effect. It is assumed that scenario 03 is selected in the lottery for the pending change scenario, and green is selected in the lottery for the light emitting color of the heel lamp light emission effect at the time of winning. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays blue hold on the display section 50a at the time of starting winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in green, and lights the chance lamp 48 in purple and all at once. Then, when the shift display to the hold 3 is displayed, the blue hold is changed to the green hold. At this time, the belly button lamp 46 remains lit in green. Thereafter, during the special figure variation based on the target reservation, the green reservation is changed to the red reservation, and the belly button lamp 46 is lit in red, which is the same as the display color of the reservation display. In this performance example, even though the pending display is blue pending at the time of starting winning, the navel lamp 46 is lit in green, so the player can recognize that although the blue pending, he can expect to win a jackpot. Then, by the time the special symbol is changed based on the target holding, it changes to red holding and the navel lamp 46 also lights up in red, so the player can watch the changing performance with high expectations for winning a jackpot. As a result, it is expected that interest in the game will increase.

In addition, the effect execution example 13 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the pre-read judgment when the fourth special figure 1 is held, a hold change effect in which the final display mode is green hold, a heel lamp light emission effect, and a purple and simultaneous display. This is an example of a case where it is decided to perform a lighting chance lamp light emission effect. It is assumed that scenario 22 is selected in the lottery for the pending change scenario, and green is selected in the lottery for the light emitting color of the heso lamp lighting effect at the time of winning. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays blue pending on the display section 50a at the time of starting winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in green, and lights the chance lamp 48 in purple and all at once. Then, when the shift to the hold 3 is displayed, the blue hold is changed to the green hold, and the belly button lamp 46 remains lit in green. In this performance example as well, since the navel lamp 46 is lit in green even though the pending display is blue pending at the start of winning, the player can recognize that he can expect to win a jackpot even though the blue pending. Then, by changing the display to green pending when shifting to pending 3, expectations for winning the jackpot can be further strengthened. As a result, it is expected that interest in the game will increase.

According to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment described above, even if the belly button lamp 46 emits light in a color that does not correspond to the display color of the pending display when winning at the first starting opening 11, the winning to the first starting opening 11 is not possible. If the display color of the pending display changes further at a timing other than the winning timing (during shift display, during the fluctuation), the display color of the pending display and the emitted light color of the belly button lamp 46 will correspond. Therefore, when the display color of the hold display and the light emission color of the belly button lamp 46 correspond, the relationship between the two effects is emphasized, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Note that the lottery table for the pending scenario (FIG. 48) and the lottery table for the heel lamp lighting effect at the time of winning (FIG. 49) in the third embodiment are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate.

<Other change examples>
In the above embodiment, even if the hold change effect is executed, the belly button lamp light emission effect may not be executed in conjunction with it (see Figure 39), but the configuration is such that the belly button light emission effect is always executed in conjunction with the hold change effect. Good too. In this case, the execution probability of the pending change effect and the execution probability of the belly button light emission effect are the same.

Further, in the above embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 is configured to be able to indicate the expectation of a jackpot based on the difference in emitted light color. , different lighting patterns such as high-speed blinking, etc.) may indicate the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in the above embodiment, the chance lamp 48 is configured to be able to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation based on the difference in the emitted light color and the difference in the light emission mode other than the emitted light color. It may also be something to do.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the chance lamp 48 emits light, it is more likely to suggest a higher jackpot expectation than when the belly button lamp 46 emits light; A configuration may be adopted in which a high jackpot expectation level is more likely to be suggested when the light is emitted, or the susceptibility to a high jackpot expectation level may be made the same in both cases.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the hold change effect is an effect in which the display color of the hold display (hold icon HA, the icon TA) is different from the normal display mode, but the change in the display mode of the hold display related to the hold change effect does not necessarily have to be a change in display color, such as a change in shape, size, or pattern. Further, it may be a combination of a change other than the display color and a change in the display color. Note that even if the change in the display mode of the hold display is a change other than the display color, it is preferable to cause the belly button lamp 46 to emit light in a predetermined color at the timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed. Note that the emitted light color of the heso lamp 46 can be set as appropriate.

Further, in the above embodiment, all of the emission colors of the chance lamp 48 are different from the emission colors of the belly button lamp 46, but the emission colors of the chance lamp 48 may include the same color as the emission color of the belly button lamp 46. . In this case, all the emission colors of the chance lamp 48 may be the same as the emission color of the heso lamp 46. Note that the order of the jackpot expectation of the same colors as the emission colors of the belly button lamp 46 included in the emission colors of the chance lamp 48 may follow the order of the jackpot expectation of each emission color of the belly button lamp 46.

In addition, in the above embodiment, sequential lighting (in detail, clockwise sequential lighting, see FIG. 41) and simultaneous lighting are used as light emission modes other than the emission color of the chance lamp 48, but blinking and counterclockwise sequential lighting are used. Other types may also be used. When a type other than sequential lighting and simultaneous lighting is adopted, the first mode and second mode as the light emission mode other than the emission color of the chance lamp 48 may be selected as appropriate.

Further, in the above embodiment, the types of display colors for the hold display can be increased or decreased as appropriate. Note that the type of emitted light color of the heso lamp 46 may be appropriately increased or decreased in accordance with the type of display color of the hold display.

Further, in the above embodiment, the execution probabilities of various effects such as the holding change effect, the belly button light emission effect, the chance lamp emission effect, etc. and the distribution rate of the effect mode can be changed as appropriate within the range that can achieve the purpose of each effect. Specifically, for example, regarding the lottery table (FIGS. 40 and 47) for chance lamp lighting effects in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation. In this case, the distribution ratio for each of "purple and sequential lighting", "yellow and sequential lighting", "purple and simultaneous lighting", and "yellow and simultaneous lighting" may be set to 5%. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to make the chance lamp lighting performance a performance that more easily suggests that the expectation of jackpot is higher than the belly button lamp lighting performance.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the belly button lamp light emission effect is executed, it is always linked to the pending change effect, but the belly button lamp light emission effect may be configured to be executable independently of the pending change effect. In this case, the execution probability of the heso lamp light emission effect may be set to the same level as in the above embodiment.

Further, in the above embodiment, the belly button lamp 46 is an example of the first light emitting section, and the chance lamp 48 is an example of the second light emitting section, but the belly button lamp 46 and the frame lamp 53 together constitute the first light emitting section. Alternatively, the chance lamp 48 and the frame lamp 53 may both constitute the second light emitting section. That is, each light emitting section (first light emitting section, second light emitting section) may be a light emitting means group including a plurality of light emitting means, and in this case, only a part of the light emitting means group emits light in response to a winning start. It may be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold change effect, the navel lamp light emission effect, and the chance lamp emission effect are executed as the look-ahead effect related to the first starting port 11, but these effects are performed as the look-ahead effect related to the second start port 12. It can also be executed as

In addition, in the above embodiment, the hold change effect, the belly button light emission effect, and the chance lamp emission effect can be performed in a low-accuracy non-time saving state, but in other game states such as a high-accuracy time-saving state or a low-accuracy time-saving state, It may be an executable configuration.

10. Inventions shown in the first embodiment and its modified examples The above-described first embodiment and its modified examples (including the second embodiment and third embodiment) have inventions of the following means. There is. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix. Note that the means A is a general term for the following means A1 to A5. Furthermore, means B is a general term for the following means B1 to B4. Means C is a general term for the following means C1 to C3.

Means A1:
It is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
A first light emitting part (belly button lamp 46) and a second light emitting part (chance lamp 48) capable of indicating the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state,
When winning a prize in a predetermined starting port (first starting port 11), the first light emitting section may emit light, and the second light emitting section may emit light (see Fig. 42). A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, since there are a plurality of light-emitting parts that emit light in response to winnings in the predetermined starting slot, it is possible to make the player interested in which light-emitting part emits light, which increases the enjoyment of the game. is expected to improve.

Means A2:
The gaming machine according to means A1,
It is more likely to be suggested that the expectation level is higher when the second light emitting section emits light than when the first light emitting section emits light (see FIGS. 37, 39, and 40). A gaming machine with special features.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second light emitting section emits light in response to winning in the predetermined starting slot, it is expected that the control will be in a more advantageous state than when the first light emitting section emits light. Since it is easy to suggest that the degree of play is high, when the second light emitting section emits light, it can greatly stimulate the player's sense of anticipation, and it is expected that the player's interest in the game will improve.

Means A3:
The gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
A game machine characterized in that the first light emitting unit (belly lamp 46) can suggest different expectations depending on the color of the emitted light (see FIGS. 37 and 39).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first light emitting section can clearly indicate the level of expectation based on the difference in the emitted color.

Means A4:
The gaming machine according to means A3,
A game characterized in that the second light emitting unit (chance lamp 48) is capable of suggesting different expectations depending on a difference in light emission mode (sequential lighting or simultaneous lighting) other than the light emission color (see FIG. 40). Machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the second light emitting section indicates the level of expectation using a different method (different light emitting mode other than the emitted color) from the first light emitting section, so both of them emit light. Compared to a configuration in which the level of expectation is indicated only by color, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Means A5:
The gaming machine according to means A4,
When executing the first specific effect (Battle Reach, see FIG. 34) and when executing the second specific effect (Story Reach, see FIG. 35) as an effect indicating whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled. There is,
When the light emitting mode other than the emitted light color in the second light emitting unit (chance lamp 48) is the first mode (sequential lighting), the second specific effect is better when the first specific effect is executed. said expectation is higher than when executed,
When the light emitting mode other than the emitted light color in the second light emitting section is the second mode (all at once lighting), the light emission mode when the second specific effect is executed is better than when the first specific effect is executed. A game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation is higher when the player is younger (see FIG. 47).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second light emitting section emits light in the first mode in response to winning in the predetermined starting opening, the second specific effect is better than when the first specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the second light emitting unit emits light in the second mode, expectations are higher when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed. Since the intensity is high, it is possible to draw attention to the combination of the light emitting mode of the second light emitting part and the type of specific performance, making it difficult to make the player think that the performance is monotonous, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Means B1:
Equipped with a specific light emitting part (belly button lamp 46) that can emit light when winning a prize in a predetermined starting port (first starting port 11),
It is possible to display a hold display (hold icon HA, icon TA) in response to winning in the predetermined starting slot,
The hold display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (normal hold, blue hold, red hold) with different expectations that are controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot game state),
causing the specific light emitting unit to emit light in response to changing the display mode of the hold display at a predetermined timing other than the timing at which a winning in the predetermined starting slot occurs (during a shift display, during said fluctuation); A gaming machine characterized by being capable of (see FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the specific light-emitting part that can emit light when a prize is won in a predetermined starting slot is at a predetermined timing other than the timing when winning in a predetermined starting slot occurs, the hold display is displayed. Since it may emit light in response to a change in the display mode, it is possible to surprise the player, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Means B2:
The gaming machine according to means B1,
The change in the display mode of the hold display includes a change in the display color of the hold display (see FIG. 37),
When causing the specific light emitting unit to emit light in response to changing the display mode of the hold display at the predetermined timing, causing the specific light emitting unit to emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the hold display after the change ( (see FIG. 39).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific light emitting section emits light at a timing other than the winning timing at the starting slot, it lights up in a color that corresponds to the display color of the pending display after the change, so it can be identified as the pending display. The relationship between the light emitting part and the light emitting part can be easily conveyed to the player, the excitement of the performance can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Means B3:
The gaming machine according to means B2,
When displaying the pending display in a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, blue pending) at the timing when a prize is won in the predetermined starting slot, a color that does not correspond to the display color of the pending display (for example, green ), it is possible to cause the specific light emitting unit (belly button lamp 46) to emit light (for example, see effect execution example 12 in FIG. 50).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific light emitting section emits light in a color that does not correspond to the display color of the pending display when winning a prize at a predetermined starting slot, the pending display is displayed at a timing other than the winning timing at the starting slot. If the display color changes further, the display color of the hold display and the light emitting color of a specific light emitting part will correspond, so when the display color of the hold display and the light emitting color of a specific light emitting part correspond, The relationship between the two performances is emphasized, and it is expected that the game will become more interesting.

Means B4:
The gaming machine according to means B2,
When displaying the pending display in a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, red pending) at the timing when a prize is won in the predetermined starting slot, a color corresponding to the display color of the pending display (for example, red ), it is possible to cause the specific light emitting section to emit light (for example, see effect execution example 4 shown in FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific light-emitting part emits light in a color corresponding to the display color of the hold display from the time of winning a prize in the predetermined starting slot, so the relationship between the specific light-emitting part and the hold display is improved. This can be expected to increase interest in gaming.

Means C1:
It is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
A first light emitting section (belly button lamp 46) and a second light emitting section (chance lamp 48) capable of indicating the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state by a difference in emitted light color,
When winning a prize in a predetermined starting port (first starting port 11), the first light emitting section may emit light, and the second light emitting section may emit light (see Fig. 42). A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, there is a plurality of light emitting parts that can indicate the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state by different colors of emitted light, and which emit light in response to winning in a predetermined starting slot. , it is possible to make the player interested in which light-emitting portion emits light in which color, and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

Means C2:
The gaming machine according to means C1,
When the first light emitting section emits light in a predetermined light emitting color (for example, red), the second light emitting section may emit light in a different light emitting color (for example, purple) from the predetermined light emitting color (for example, (See performance execution example 9 shown in FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the first light-emitting section and the second light-emitting section may emit light in different colors depending on a winning in a predetermined starting slot, thereby improving the diversity of performances. Therefore, it is expected that interest in gaming will increase.

Means C3:
The gaming machine according to means C2,
It is possible to display a hold display (hold icon HA, icon TA) in response to winning in the predetermined starting slot,
The pending display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors (blue, red) that differ in the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The emitted light color of the first light emitting unit (heso lamp 46) corresponds to the display color of the hold display (see FIG. 39),
A gaming machine characterized in that the emitted light color of the second light emitting section (chance lamp 48) does not correspond to the display color of the hold display (see FIG. 40).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the light emitting color of the first light emitting part that can emit light in response to winning in a predetermined starting slot corresponds to the display color of the hold display, so that the first light emitting part and the hold The relevance of the presentation to the display is enhanced. Furthermore, since the emitted light color of the second light emitting part does not correspond to the display color of the hold display, even if the display color of the hold display is a color with low expectations, it can be an advantageous situation depending on the emitted light color of the second light emitting part. It can create a sense of expectation in being controlled. As a result, it is expected that interest in gaming will increase.

By the way, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine which is an example of a game machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-150713, a movable body under the starting hole is rotated in response to a ball entering a first starting hole. In addition, a gaming machine is known that can perform a winning effect in which a starting lamp is blinked. However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine that performs a performance in response to a ball entering a starting hole, such as the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-150713, in order to improve the interest of the game.

The above-mentioned means A provides a case where the first light emitting part emits light and the second light emitting part emits light when winning a prize in a predetermined starting slot for the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-150713. The difference is that there are cases where it is done. In addition, the above-mentioned means B provides a gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2019-150713 that is equipped with a specific light-emitting part capable of emitting light when winning a prize in a predetermined starting port, The difference is that it is possible to cause a specific light emitting unit to emit light in response to changing the display mode of the pending icon at a predetermined timing other than the timing at which the icon occurs. In addition, the above-mentioned means C provides a first method for the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-150713 that can suggest the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by means of a difference in emitted light color. It is equipped with a light-emitting part and a second light-emitting part, and when winning a prize in a predetermined starting slot, the first light-emitting part may emit light, and the second light-emitting part may emit light." There is. Thereby, the inventions of means A to C can solve the problem of "improving the interest of gaming" (achieving the effect).

11. Fourth Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 51 to 66. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment in that it is possible to display the so-called normal base on the 7-segment display 300, and is equipped with a function to prevent over-winning balls.

Note that the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is a so-called V-sure ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to execute jackpot games including a round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened, and in the round game in which the second big prize opening 15 is opened, V passes (to the specific area 16). ), when the jackpot game ends, turn on the probability change flag (flag indicating that it is in a high probability state) and the time saving flag (flag indicating that it is in a time saving state) (in a high probability high base state). ), and set both the probability variation counter (counter that counts the upper limit number of special symbol fluctuations in the high probability state) and the time saving counter (counter that counts the upper limit number of special symbol fluctuations in the time saving state) to "160", If V does not pass during the jackpot game, only the time saving flag is turned ON (to put it in a low probability/high base state) at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving counter is set to "160".

<Display on 7-segment display>
First, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be explained. On the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio between the total number of normal prize balls won by the player in the normal gaming state and the normal number of balls fired by the player in the normal gaming state, is displayed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. Note that the 7-segment display 300 displays bases other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state to the number of time-saving shot balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, and jackpot game). The jackpot base, which is the ratio between the total number of jackpot balls won by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of jackpot balls fired by the player in the jackpot game state, is never displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to always count the number of normally fired balls, the total number of normally prized balls, and the total number of fired balls. The total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). The total number of fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor. The number of normally fired balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The total number of normal prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out by the game control microcomputer 101 in the normal gaming state.

The information on the number of normally fired balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 (FIG. (see) is stored in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normally fired balls, the information on the total number of normally awarded balls, and the information on the total number of fired balls are maintained (not deleted). In this way, even if the RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base using the normal number of balls fired at the time of power cutoff and the normal total prize ball number at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 then displays the normal base value on the 7-segment display 300 regardless of the gaming state (in the normal gaming state, jackpot gaming state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.). It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of fired balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000 becomes the first normal base. Thereafter, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 60,001 shots, the value that was the first normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated when the total number of fired balls increases from 60,001 to 120,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 120,001 shots, the value that was the normal base of the previous round will be stored as the normal base of the second round, and the value that was the current normal base will be stored as the normal base of the previous round. Ru. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 120,001 to 180,000 becomes the current normal base.

After that, if the total number of balls fired exceeds 180,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 1 time ago will be stored as the normal base 2 times ago. The value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of balls fired exceeds 240,001 shots, the value that was the normal base 3 times ago will be deleted, the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago, and the value that was the normal base 2 times ago will be stored as the normal base 3 times ago. The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times before, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time before. The normal base calculated until the total number of fired balls increases from 240,001 to 300,000 becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, the normal base is similarly calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the normal base values up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104. You can leave it there. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the current normal base ⇒ 1 previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 on the 7-segment display 300. The display is changed every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (first display area 310 and second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340), the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value shown in the right two digits (normal base) is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the current normal base display started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b1" in the left two digits, and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the previous normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 will display "b2" in the left two digits, and the two previous normal base will be displayed in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base two times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the display of the previous two normal bases started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits, and the three previous normal bases in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the normal base three times ago.

Then, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal base display three times before, on the 7-segment display 300, as described above, the left two digits indicate "bL" and the right two digits indicate the current state. The normal base of is displayed and the same is repeated thereafter.

Furthermore, in the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the two digits on the right. That is, when the total number of fired balls is 300 balls or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and after the total number of fired balls exceeds 300 balls, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, if the total number of balls fired is 300 balls or less, the value of the denominator of the normal base (the number of balls normally fired) is too small, thereby avoiding displaying the unreliable value of the normal base. There is. In addition, even if the total number of fired balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 will repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, on the 7-segment display 300, if the number of balls normally fired is 6000 balls or less after the power is turned on for the first time after leaving the factory, the two digits on the left will indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3". ' will start blinking. Thereafter, when the number of normally fired balls exceeds 6000 balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the two digits on the left become lit. In this way, when the two digits on the left flash to a person who is checking the normal base on the 7-segment display 300, the normal base value shown on the two digits on the right has not yet converged sufficiently. It is possible to make the user understand that the value is not present. In other words, if you show the lighting mode in the two digits on the left to someone who is checking the normal base, they will understand that the normal base value shown in the two digits on the right is a value that has converged to some extent. It is possible to do so.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. Thereafter, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode ends and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340. In this way, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Further, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the normal base display starts. As described above, when transitioning to the setting mode after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting parts LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, "8.8.8.8." is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, the initial display is performed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on, thereby indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-winning ball prevention function>
Next, the over-winning ball prevention function in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 is capable of operating an excessive prize ball prevention function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prize ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unplayable on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 (standard number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player obtains (is paid out to the player) in all gaming states (normal playing state, jackpot playing state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) It is. Note that the total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but does not mean the total number of prize balls that are actually paid out to the player. It's okay. As mentioned above, the total number of balls fired is the number of balls fired by the player in all game states.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize pitch number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of fired balls at any time after the power is turned on, and information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the gaming RAM 104. The total number of balls fired is stored in the storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of balls fired from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is The difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erasable storage section 107 of the RAM 104.

Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-erasable storage section 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the difference in the number of balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of fired balls at the time of power cutoff. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to treat the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of balls fired is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control processing related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 57), but also fires the game balls. The firing control process (the process of step S109 described later, see FIG. 57) for the purpose of this is also stopped. Therefore, even if the player rotates the handle 72k, the game ball is not shot, and the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played. In addition, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and stops receiving signals according to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and the display devices 8 and 7 segments The display control of the display 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the dispensing control board 170.

After the over-winning ball prevention function is activated, the situation in which the game cannot be executed continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the excessive prize ball prevention function is canceled on the condition that RAM clearing is executed. That is, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the gaming hall turns off the power by turning off the power switch 193. Then, when turning on the power by turning on the power switch 193, the employee of the gaming hall depresses the RAM clear switch 191. Thereby, by executing RAM clear, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and firing control process regarding the game. In this way, in this embodiment, after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be resumed simply by turning the power off and on (re-on), but the game can be restarted only by clearing the RAM. can.

Next, the timing at which the excessive prize ball prevention function operates will be explained based on FIG. 51. The over-prize ball prevention function is activated when the player shifts from an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state on the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. In other words, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not necessarily operate at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high probability high base state after a jackpot game or a low probability high base state after a jackpot game.

For example, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 51(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Next, assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 51(B). At this time, the excessive prize ball prevention function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of transitioning from this jackpot game state to the high-accuracy, high-base state, the over-prize ball prevention function does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(C), at the timing of transition from the high-accuracy, high-base state to the normal gaming state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, in this embodiment, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the high probability high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing when the advantageous game state ends for the player. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the information on the difference number of balls is stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, and the difference number of balls is not reset (cleared) by turning the power off and on. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the difference in the number of balls will not be reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, even during business hours, there are situations where the power is turned off and turned on (re-on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, breakdowns, severe fraud, etc. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the purpose of providing the over-prize ball prevention function will be lost. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, there is a risk that the player who restarts the game afterward will be given an unfair advantage by making it difficult for the over-prize ball prevention function to operate. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned unfair advantage from being given to the player, the number of differential balls is not reset by turning the power back on or executing RAM clearing.

Next, the conditions under which the difference number of balls is reset will be explained based on FIG. 52. In this embodiment, there are two reset conditions for resetting the difference number of balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 52(A). In other words, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. do. Note that when the information on the number of differential balls stored in the differential ball number storage section 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the total number of award balls and the total number of balls stored in the total number of award balls storage section 107a are also reset (cleared). The information on the total number of fired balls stored in the fired ball number storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter it will simply be referred to as "the difference number of balls is reset (cleared)". Although FIG. 52(A) shows a case where the number of difference balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed while waiting for a customer, it does not matter in which gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference number of balls is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 52(A). In other words, if the game is not played for an hour after entering the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 will delete the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107. clear. Note that the customer waiting state is a gaming state in which no game is executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), assume that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 in a jackpot game state due to a game played by a certain player. Thereafter, when a certain player transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the high-probability-high-base state and then to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game has ended. In this case, for the player who starts the next game, if the number of difference balls increases by a small amount (within 10,000), the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the special reset switch 181 is pressed to reset the difference number of balls. Thereby, an employee of the gaming parlor can press the special reset switch 181 at any timing after a certain player finishes playing the game to reset the number of difference balls. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference in the number of balls is automatically reset. Thereby, the difference in the number of balls can be reset without placing a burden on the employees of the game parlor. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the next player who starts the game from having the excessive prize ball prevention function activated immediately after starting the game, which would put him at a huge disadvantage. It is possible.

Next, the production mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated will be explained based on FIG. 53(A). When the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the message "Error X, excessive prize ball error, please clear RAM" is displayed. An error cancellation method image ERX showing the error is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 53(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be played. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 53(A) continues until the power is cut off. The effect mode shown in FIG. 53(A) is canceled when RAM clear is executed, but it continues as it is only by turning the power back on.

Here, a case will be described in which an illegal magnetism is detected in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal according to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the firing control process related to the game, similarly to when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. In this way, the situation in which the game cannot be executed due to magnetic detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes game control processing and firing control processing regarding the game by turning the power off and on (returning the power on). can do.

Next, the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be explained based on FIG. 53(B). When an incorrect magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, a red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. An error release method image ER1 indicating "Please do so" is displayed. Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. In this way, when comparing the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see Figure 53 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see Figure 53 (B)), the release method Everything other than the image is the same. Therefore, it is necessary to make employees or players at the gaming parlor aware that they are in a situation where they cannot play the game both when illegal magnetism is detected and when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to make it easier.

Next, the performance mode when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000 will be explained based on FIG. 54(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(A). First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a round image G109 and a prize pitch number image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the difference number of balls reaches 70,000, a purple border image EFa is displayed on the edge of the display section 50a, and an over-prize image EFa is displayed at the bottom of the display section 50a, indicating that "over-prize ball abnormality with 10,000 shots left". A ball preview image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple border image EFa and the over-prized ball preview image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple border image EFa continues even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the super prize ball preview image KY ends when the jackpot game state ends. Note that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Next, the effect mode when the difference number of balls reaches 80,000 will be explained based on FIG. 54(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(B). As shown in FIG. 54(B), a round image G109 and a prize ball count image G110 are displayed on the display unit 50a. When the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, a red border image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating that the game will be stopped when the rush ends is displayed at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know that the game stop is approaching and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH ends when the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(A), the production mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 55(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A purple border image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple border image EFa allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000.

Further, after the number of differential balls reaches 80,000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(B), the presentation mode in the high-accuracy-high base state is as shown in FIG. 55(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect pattern EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play the game while being aware that the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(A), an explanation will be given of a presentation mode when the number of difference balls is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. In this case, an employee of the game center has opened the front door 23 to the outer frame 22 and has pressed the special reset switch 181. Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(B), a performance mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display unit 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a. This makes it possible for employees at the gaming parlor to know that the difference in the number of balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 executes what is shown in FIG. 57 as the main side timer interrupt process (S005).

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] Main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the fourth embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 57, in the main side timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned ON when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unplayable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processes of steps S102 to S113 are executed. In other words, the game is ready for play.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 25), when the game stop flag is ON and RAM clear is executed, it is switched to OFF. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed while the game stop flag is ON, it remains ON. In other words, the state of the game stop flag does not change just by turning the power back on. In this way, after the game stop flag is turned ON due to the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not RAM clear is executed.

If the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102) to be described later is executed. Then, after performing normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103), sensor detection processing (S104), and normal operation processing (S105), the difference ball count measurement processing (S106) described later, and the special operation processing ( Execute S107). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sorting device control process (S108), and executes a firing control process (S109) for controlling the firing of game balls. By executing the firing control process (S109), the player can fire the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the firing control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be fired even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display on the 7-segment display 300. Next, error processing (S111) is executed to determine an error (unauthorized use) due to magnetic detection, an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, etc. In error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected by the magnetic sensor. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error process (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processes (S113). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process (S114) when the power is cut off, and ends this process. In the power outage monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power will be cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, it will display game information, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of balls fired, and number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, prohibition of access to the gaming RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 58, in the input processing (S102), it is first determined whether the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201) If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process advances to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erasing clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clearing process (S202), information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and number of difference balls. The information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erasing clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erasing storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of fired balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300, as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball count reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 56(A). In step S204, other processing is executed and the present processing ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores it in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 59, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, a total prize ball count process is executed to count the total number of prize balls paid out to the player (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage section 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, a total number of fired balls counting process is executed to count the total number of fired balls based on the detection by the discharge port sensor (S302). Information on the counted total number of fired balls is stored in the total number of fired balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the difference ball number calculation process is executed to calculate the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls (S303). Information on the calculated difference number of balls is stored in the difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether the over-prize ball notification flag is OFF. The over-prized ball notice flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 70,000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70,000 (NO in S305), the process advances to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70,000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notification flag is turned on (S306), and the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. As a result, when the super-prize ball preview command is sent to the sub-control board 120, the purple border image EFa and the super-prize ball preview image KY are displayed on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 54(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize ball flag indicates that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more (S309). If it is less than 80,000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80,000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize ball flag is turned ON (S310). Then, an over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S312), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 54(B).

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 60, in the special operation processing (S107), the processing regarding the special figure display 81 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 14D, second grand prize device 15D) is divided into four stages. "Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby including processing such as determining a jackpot and starting a variable display of the special symbol. Processing (S1302) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) includes processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol. is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), special symbol confirmation processing (S1306) including processing such as shifting the gaming state is performed, If the "special operation status" is "4" (all of S1301, S1303, and S1305 are NO), special electric accessory processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big prize opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 61, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2) is "0" or not. is determined (S1401). If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the second starting slot 12, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 11 (namely, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the first starting slot 11, the customer It is determined whether the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the vehicle is in a customer waiting state. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process to be described later is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO in S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 12 (the reserved information of special drawing 2 ), when there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the first reservation in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b. Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special pattern 2 variation start command) set in the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special pattern stop pattern data set in the special pattern 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) are included.

In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information for special drawing 2, but the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is not "0". If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to winning in the 1 starting opening 11 (pending information of the special figure 1), the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) and the special figure 1 variation are performed. Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a is shifted one place from the current position to the side where it is read out, and it corresponds to the fourth reservation in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. Clear the storage area (the storage area furthest from the side from which the data is read) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412) and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information on the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) are included.

Proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON or not, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process is executed to clear (reset) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is used to measure the time that the customer waiting state continues. Note that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared by turning on the power again, regardless of whether RAM clearing is executed or not.

[Customer waiting measurement process] As shown in FIG. 62, in the customer waiting measurement process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increase process is executed to increase the value of the customer waiting counter (S1420). Thereby, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the time period during which the customer waiting state continues based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Next, it is determined whether the customer waiting state continues for more than one hour. If it is determined that the process is not continuing (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process continues (YES in S1421), a non-erasing clear process is executed (S1422), similar to the process in step S202 described above (see FIG. 58). As a result, the information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c are stored. The information on the number of balls that are currently in play will be cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S1423), and this processing is completed. In this way, when the non-erasing clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball count reset notification image CLS is displayed at the lower part of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 56(B).

[Special symbol confirmation process] As shown in FIG. 63, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), first, the stop time of the special symbol (the stop time determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not passed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process to be described later is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data according to the opening pattern) may be performed every round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a game state reset process following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the control is performed in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the special operation status is set to "1" (S1909) to end the process in order to not start the jackpot game.

[Game State Management Process] As shown in FIG. 64, in the game state management process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON or not (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), decrease the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state by 1 (S2002), and check whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" or not. Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2004) and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time-saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" or not. (S2007) If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned off (S2008) and the process advances to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process advances to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON or not. In other words, it is determined whether the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process advances to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010) and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute.

In step S2011, a game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). Further, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

In step S2012, a gaming state designation command including information on the current gaming state (information on whether the probability change flag and time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the probability variation counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 65, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing to be described later is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in each of the above-mentioned processing are output to the sub control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer edge signal output processing] As shown in FIG. 66, in the outer edge signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (S3101). In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notification flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process advances to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize ball notice (S3102), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize ball notice") is sent to the main control board 100. The information is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for announcing the winning ball to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, the employees of the gaming hall who are monitoring the hall computer are informed of the situation in which the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated if the number of differential balls increases (within 10,000) in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is possible to make them understand.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the over-prize ball flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of balls has reached 80,000. If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process advances to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), the outer end signal output process for over-prize balls is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the outer edge signal output process for super prize balls (S3104), an outer edge signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer edge signal for super prize balls") is output from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal for super prize ball preview to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the gaming hall who is monitoring the hall computer will notice that the difference in the number of balls in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has reached 80,000 and that the high-accuracy high base state or the low-accuracy low base state has ended. It is possible to grasp the situation in which the game becomes impossible to play.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is no longer playable. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), the game stop outer end signal output process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output processing (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as the "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-winning ball prevention function is output as the main It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation where the game cannot be played due to the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether the non-erasure clearing process shown in step S203 or the non-erasing clearing process shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, information on the total number of award balls stored in the total number of award balls storage unit 107a, information on the total number of fired balls stored in the total number of fired balls storage unit 107b, and information on the total number of fired balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c. It is determined whether or not the information on the number of differential balls present has been cleared. If the non-erasure clearing process is not being executed (NO in S3107), the process advances to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erasing clear process is being executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process advances to step S3109. In the reset outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") indicating that the number of differential balls has been reset is transmitted from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. and is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the reset outer end signal to the external unit GU through parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the gaming parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to understand the situation in which the number of differential balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. In addition, a dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an outer end signal for super prize ball notice, an outer end signal for super prize ball, and an outer end signal for game stop are transmitted. , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170.

<Actions and effects of the fourth embodiment>
As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, and there is no particular disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, which allows the player to stop playing at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop playing, and which does not award excessive prize balls.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the high base state ends. In other words, after transitioning from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of fired balls increases, and a situation where the difference in number of balls becomes less than 80,000 can be assumed. Therefore, in order to prevent the above situation from occurring, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000, and a player who plays the game later starts playing immediately, if the difference in number of balls becomes 80,000 or more, a serious problem occurs. A situation arises. Therefore, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the measured number of differential balls is reset based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, the difference number of balls is reset when the special reset switch 181 is pressed or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when an employee of the game parlor presses down the RAM clear switch 191 when turning on the power, game information (for example, information on the game state such as a high probability state, information on special drawings pending, etc.) While the information such as the number of winnings and the result of determining whether the jackpot is correct or not is deleted, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference ball number storage unit 107c is not deleted. Therefore, even in a situation where game information must be deleted due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the measured number of difference balls from being deleted.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, even if RAM clearing is executed, the measured difference number of balls is not erased. However, by pressing the special reset switch 181 by an employee of the gaming hall, the measured number of difference balls can be erased. In this way, an employee of the gaming hall can erase the measured difference in the number of balls at any timing.

<Example of modification of the fourth embodiment>
Modifications of the fourth embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modification of the fourth embodiment, the same components as the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples of the fourth embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, technical features in the fourth embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configurations included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications (including the second embodiment and third embodiment) described above are applicable to the fourth embodiment and It can be adopted in gaming machines understood from the modified example.

In the fourth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V-probability machine (a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which a transition to a high probability state is determined by In addition, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine in which a high probability state ends according to the number of changes in special symbols), but once it is controlled to a high probability state, the high probability continues until the start of the next jackpot game. It may be configured as a gaming machine in which control to a probability state continues (a so-called variable loop type machine) or a falling machine (a gaming machine in which a high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Furthermore, the present invention may be configured as a gaming machine that executes a small winning game in which the big prize opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery. In this case, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball that enters the jackpot due to execution of the small jackpot passes through a specific area in the jackpot. . Then, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. It may be configured as a type 2 jackpot game.

In the fourth embodiment, when the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more and the transition is made from a high probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) to a normal gaming state (see FIG. 51) or a low probability high base state (advantageous gaming state) ) to the normal gaming state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. However, the excessive prize ball prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state, but also when the advantageous gaming state ends. For example, when transitioning from a high-accuracy, high-base state (advantageous gaming state) to a low-accuracy, high-base state, or from a high-accuracy, high-base state to a high-accuracy, low-base state, the over-winning ball prevention function is activated. You can also do it.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, when transitioning from the high probability high base state to the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4 (predetermined number). It is assumed that the special drawing 2 drawing is executed with priority over the special drawing 1 drawing, and is set to be more advantageous to the player than the special drawing 1 drawing. In this case, when the state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the normal gaming state, the lottery of the special drawing 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the state is still advantageous for the player. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous gaming state until all of the remaining special drawing 2 reservations (special drawing 2 remaining reservations) are used up when the state shifts to the normal gaming state. Then, when all the remaining special symbols 2 are used up (when the variable display and stop display of the 2nd special symbol based on the remaining 2 special symbols are all finished), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (game (see FIG. 67). In addition, the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed with priority over the drawing for special drawing 2, or the drawing for special drawing 1 may be executed in priority order than the drawing for special drawing 2. A lottery or a special drawing 2 lottery may be executed.

In particular, if it is a 1st and 2nd type mixing machine and you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the 2nd type jackpot game will virtually always be executed (the game ball can pass through a specific area). In this case, as shown in FIG. 67, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated when all the remaining special drawings 2 are used up in the normal gaming state. This is because even if the state shifts from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, the type 2 jackpot game is very likely to be executed until all of the remaining reserved special symbols 2 are used up. That is, if the game becomes impossible to execute due to the activation of the over-prize ball prevention function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance to win the type 2 jackpot game will be lost, which will be bad for the player. Note that the upper limit number of special drawings 2 reserved is not limited to four, but may be one, for example, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function is activated is when the high-accuracy high-base state ends or when the low-accuracy high-base state ends. However, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated only when the high-accuracy, high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (consecutive game period)" ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in number of balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or at the timing when the customer waiting state continues for a certain fixed period of time. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference number of balls is 80,000 or more and the jackpot game state ends. Further, for example, the over-prize ball prevention function may be activated at the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more.

In the fourth embodiment, the first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed (see FIG. 52(A)), or the first reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the second reset condition (see FIG. 52(B)) is satisfied, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the difference in the number of balls reaches 80,000 or more, as shown in FIG. The difference in the number of balls may be reset when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous gaming state) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the difference in number of balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (consecutive play period)" ends, so only if the difference in number of balls reaches 80,000 (standard number) during one rush state. , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-accuracy, high-base state and the low-accuracy, high-base state, the number of differential balls may be reset when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state or a high-accuracy, low-base state to a normal gaming state. . Further, the number of differential balls may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference number of balls may be reset. In this case, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time (for example, one hour), it means that the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the difference number of balls, it is possible to prevent the difference number of balls from exceeding 80,000 for a while. Note that the above-mentioned specific time is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. Further, for example, the difference in the number of balls may be reset by turning the power off and on (turning the power back on).

For example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 a.m.), it may reset the difference in the number of balls. In this case, it is possible to automatically erase the difference in the number of balls without forcing the employees of the gaming center to perform any operations. Note that the above-mentioned reference time is not limited to 9:00 a.m. and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of differential balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference number of balls can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or on a dedicated board.

In the fourth embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed on the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed on the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured number of difference balls on the display 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of differential balls is 0 to 50,000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and the number of differential balls is 50,001 to 70,000. (second range), the second mode is displayed on the display 8 or the 7-segment display 300, and when the difference in the number of balls is between 70,001 and 80,000 (third range), the second mode is displayed. The third aspect may be displayed on the appliance 8 or 7 segment display 300. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of differential balls (or information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 displays the image. The difference in the number of balls may be displayed on a display means such as the device 50. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of prize balls that have been paid out (or the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be paid out) and information on detection by the discharge port sensor to the sub-control board 120. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 may calculate the difference number of balls based on this information, and display the difference number of balls on a display means such as the image display device 50.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference number of balls on the 7-segment display 300, as in a modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, the information on the difference number of balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections), and is stored in the four storage areas of the difference ball number storage section 107c of the non-erasable storage section 107, respectively. . The first storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time. The second storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) until when the power was turned off last time. The third storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before. The 4th (N)th storage area stores the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two previous times (three times ago) to when the power was turned off two previous times. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured difference in the number of balls is shifted and stored, and the difference in the number of balls stored in the fourth storage area is erased. Note that the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if RAM clear is executed.

In this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The difference number of balls stored in the second storage area is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300, switching sequentially in units of 1,000 balls. Ru. Specifically, on the 7-segment display 300, for example, "bL36" is displayed for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 69(A). This shows that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the previous normal base was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the normal base three times ago was 38%.

Subsequently, on the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 69(E), for example, "cL20" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on this time to the present time is 20,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the difference in the number of balls between when the power is turned on last time (one time before) and when the power is turned off last time is "0". Note that if the total number of fired balls is greater than the total number of prized balls and the difference in number of balls is smaller than "0", "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on the time before the last time (two times before) until the time when the power was turned off the time before the last time was 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This shows that the difference in the number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before last (three times ago) until when the power was turned off two times before last was 48,000. Thereafter, FIGS. 69(A) to 69(H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the above-mentioned modification, the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored each time the power is turned off and turned on (re-on), and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area is is now deleted. However, each time RAM clearing is executed, the measured number of difference balls may be shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N)th storage area may be deleted. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined time (for example, 9 a.m.), the measured difference number of balls is shifted and stored in the 4th (N)th storage area. The difference in the number of balls may be deleted. Note that N described above can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 69, the display of the difference number of balls was automatically switched every 5 seconds on the 7-segment display 300. However, the display of the difference number of balls may be changed by operating a predetermined operation means, such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180. Furthermore, the display of the normal base and the display of the difference number of balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means.

In the fourth embodiment, when the number of differential balls reaches 70,000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. 54(A) indicates that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. However, the presentation mode indicating that the over-prize ball prevention function is approaching activation is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 54(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 70,000") or a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the panel lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53 indicates that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation. It may also be shown as follows. Furthermore, as the number of differential balls increases, it may be shown that the excessive prize ball prevention function is approaching activation by a presentation mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the fourth embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80,000 (reference number), a situation is shown in which the game may be stopped by the performance mode shown in FIG. 54(B). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation where the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 54(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a situation in which the game may be stopped may be indicated by a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The difference in number of balls is 80,000") or by a special light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 or the frame lamp 53. good.

In the fourth embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the performance mode shown in FIG. 53(A) shows a situation in which the game cannot be executed. However, the performance mode indicating a situation in which a game cannot be executed is not limited to the performance mode shown in FIG. 53(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "The game cannot be played" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "The game cannot be played") may be output from the speaker 52.

In the fourth embodiment, even if RAM clearing is executed, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage section 107c is not deleted. However, even if the information on the difference number of balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erase storage section) of the gaming RAM 104, and when the RAM clear is executed, the information on the difference number of balls is cleared. good. In other words, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include that RAM clearing is executed, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is only that RAM clearing is executed. Also good.

In the fourth embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 57), but also fires the game ball. The firing control process (processing in step S109, see FIG. 57) for this purpose was also stopped. However, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the firing control process. However, in this case, even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotation operation on the handle 72k. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible for the player to quickly understand the situation in which the game cannot be executed. For example, when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, at the timing when the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, the game ball may still be flowing down the game area 6, and the game ball may enter the various prize openings and award the player a prize. There is a problem that balls can be applied. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the firing control process, it is possible to ensure that prize balls are not awarded to the player after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of fired balls based on the detection of the discharge port sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors that detect winnings in various winning holes (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a), , the total number of balls fired may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the total The number of balls fired may be counted.

In the fourth embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70,000, as shown in FIG. 54(A), an over-prize ball preview image KY is displayed. However, regardless of the difference in the number of balls, the game becomes unplayable under the condition that the difference in the number of balls is 80,000 or more in customer waiting performances, performances during jackpot games (e.g. ending performances), preview performances accompanying variable performances, etc. You may perform a performance that explains what will happen. This is because such an effect allows players and employees of the gaming parlor to be informed in advance that the pachinko gaming machine has a function to prevent over-winning balls.

In the fourth embodiment, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls are stored in the non-erasable storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104, so that even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the total number of fired balls, and the number of differential balls was prevented from being deleted. However, by storing information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of differential balls in a nonvolatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the gaming RAM 104, Even if RAM clearing is executed, information on the total number of prize balls, information on the total number of fired balls, and information on the number of difference balls may not be deleted.

In the fourth embodiment, the number of difference balls is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the counting of the difference number of balls may start from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal gaming state). In this case, the negative difference in the number of balls (that is, the total number of balls fired) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of balls that triggers the over-winning ball prevention function to be the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 separately counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls, and calculates the difference number of balls by subtracting the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls. . However, the number of difference balls may be measured (counted) using only a difference ball counter for counting the number of difference balls. That is, each time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Furthermore, each time a game ball is fired (every time the discharge port sensor detects the ball), the value of the difference ball counter is subtracted. In this way, the difference number of balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. In this case, the value of the difference ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more without becoming negative. By doing so, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function to be substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the fourth embodiment, the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated on the condition that the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) is 80,000 (standard number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number) which is the standard for the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is not limited to 80,000, but may be 50,000, 100,000, or 120,000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the excessive prize ball prevention function is the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls. However, from the viewpoint of not awarding excessive prize balls, the specific measurement number can be changed as appropriate as long as it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player. For example, the specific measured number may be the number of differential balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state or a certain period such as a consecutive game period. For example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. It's okay to have one. Further, for example, the specific measurement number may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period.

In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko game machine in which game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko game machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine in which game balls housed inside the machine can circulate and enter the game area again after flowing down the game area. In this case, a 7-segment display is arranged on a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170. Therefore, it may be possible to display the difference number of balls (specific measurement number) on this 7-segment display. There is also a 6-digit, 7-segment display at the bottom of the front door that displays the number of balls you have. Therefore, the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) may be displayed on this 6-digit 7-segment display. Note that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting or counting.

<Invention shown in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications described above, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention related to means X1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment) including a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000) and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 51), the game ends. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping the game control process and the firing control process).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state ends, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous gaming state, and there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention related to means X2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) shifts to the normal gaming state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, the game becomes impossible to execute. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention related to means X3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state occurs, the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) is completed in the normal gaming state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game so that it cannot be played (see FIG. 67).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state, the winning determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number of times. In this case, the game is considered to be a substantially advantageous gaming state until a predetermined number of pending hit determination processes are completed in the normal gaming state, and when the substantially advantageous gaming state ends, the game is stopped. Is possible.

The invention related to means X4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with a ball entry port (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling the game ball to enter the ball entry easy state (high base state) in which the game ball enters the ball entry hole more easily than the normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball entry state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the ball entry easy state in which the game ball enters the entry hole more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unplayable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game before the situation where the number of balls in possession decreases after the easy-to-enter state ends.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means X1 to X4 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , is different in that when the specific measured number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be impossible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention related to means Y1 is:
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment) including a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the gaming,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the firing control process are stopped) (see FIG. 51);
Based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on (a first reset condition in which the special reset switch 181 is pressed, a second reset condition in which the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specified number of measurements is determined. This is a gaming machine characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measured number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing before the specific measured number reaches the reference number, and a player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific measured number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the specific measurement number is erased based on the satisfaction of the reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who played a game later from stopping the game immediately after starting the game, and it is possible to prevent a serious situation from occurring.

The invention related to means Y2 is:
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 52(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, for example, after a certain player finishes playing the game, an employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, thereby erasing the specific measurement number. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means Y3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The game control means can control the game to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the winning determination process;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 52(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, the specific measurement number is erased, assuming that the player has changed. With this, it is possible for a player who plays a game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention related to means Y4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is a transition from an advantageous gaming state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal gaming state (see FIG. 68(A)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the player shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific measurement number is erased. In this way, once the situation where the advantageous gaming state continues ends, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention related to means Y5 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the normal gaming state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 68(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the normal gaming state continues for a specific period of time, it means that a situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by erasing the specific measured number, it is possible to prevent the specific measured number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means Y1 to Y5 is such that, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, the game control means can measure a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement is performed based on the establishment of a reset condition that is not triggered by power-on. They differ in that they erase numbers. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention related to means Z1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment) including an operable specific operating means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific measurement number (difference number of balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific measurement number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80,000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing are stopped);
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measured number. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes impossible to execute based on the specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls being equal to or greater than the reference number. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when an employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, the game information related to the game is erased, but the specific measurement number that has been measured is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the gaming state related to a game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible to prevent the specific measurement number from being erased.

The invention related to means Z2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Z1,
Equipped with a special operable operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that the specific measurement number can be erased based on the operation of the special operation means (see FIG. 52(A)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific measurement number is erased by the gaming parlor employee operating the special operation means. Thereby, even if the gaming state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the gaming parlor can erase the specific measured number at any timing.

The invention related to means Z3 is:
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9 a.m.), the specific measurement number can be deleted.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the specific measurement number is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the specific measurement number without requiring an employee of the game parlor to operate it.

The invention related to means Z4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific measurement numbers are stored in order by dividing them into predetermined periods from the first to the N(4)th period (period from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off),
In conjunction with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is changed to the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined periods. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified measurement number is shifted as shown in FIG.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to store specific measured numbers for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth. Then, as the specific measurement number for the Nth predetermined period is deleted, the specific measurement number for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is changed to the specific measurement number for the second to Nth predetermined period. Shifted as a measurement number. Then, measurement of the specific measurement number for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the specific measurement number for each predetermined period from the first to the Nth without requiring an employee of the game parlor to operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-209170, there is a possibility that a player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing playing the game. In this case, there was no attempt to prevent the gaming machine from awarding excessive prize balls to the player. Therefore, the invention according to means Z1 to Z4 provides a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, in which the game control means is capable of measuring a specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unplayable based on the specific measured number exceeding a predetermined reference number, and game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. The difference is that while it erases the specific number of measurements taken, it does not erase the specific number of measurements taken. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (achieve an effect).

12. Fifth Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 70 to 78. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the same components as the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) to intentionally set a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Note that the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery (lottery related to the second starting opening 12), a small winning game that opens the second big prize opening 15 is executed, and a small winning When a game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15 during the game (so-called V passing), a jackpot game including a plurality of round games that open the first big prize opening 14 is executed. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, types of stop symbols in the fifth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment determines the special symbol random number obtained based on the winning in the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 70(A). It is determined whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 70(A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) based on winnings in the first starting hole 11, a jackpot (so-called Type 1 jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but a small There is no chance of winning. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the prize entered into the second starting hole 12, a small win is always won. That is, in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is no chance of winning a jackpot (so-called type 1 jackpot), and there is no chance of losing.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot symbol type is determined by determining the symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number) according to the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 70(B). Determine. In the lottery for special pattern 1, "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. Note that the results of the special drawing 2 lottery do not include jackpots (Type 1 jackpots). When the type of the winning jackpot symbol is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening in the type 1 jackpot game and the settings regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 71). This point will be discussed later.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a small hit has been won, the type of the small winning symbol is determined by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 70(C). do. Specifically, in the special drawing 2 lottery, the "special drawing 2_small winning pattern s" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the "special drawing 2_small winning pattern t" is determined at a rate of 20%. If the type of the small winning symbol that has been won is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game or the type 2 jackpot game and the settings regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 71). This point will be discussed later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that neither the jackpot nor the small win has been won (that is, when it is determined that it is a loss), the symbol type random number is changed to the loss symbol type shown in FIG. 70(D). The type of losing symbol is determined by making a determination according to the determination table. In the lottery for special pattern 1, 80% of the time the winning pattern will be “Special pattern 1_Loss pattern S”, 10% of the time it will be “Special pattern 1_ Losing pattern T”, and 10% of the time it will be “Special pattern 1_ Losing pattern S”. Special figure 1_Loss pattern U” is decided. Note that the results of the special drawing 2 lottery do not include losses. The difference in the type of losing symbols affects the settings regarding the gaming state after the losing symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 72). This point will be discussed later.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment loses, it determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether or not to do so. The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal time saving state described below. When the time is not in the normal time saving state, the probability of determining that there is a reach is higher than when the normal time saving state is in the normal time saving state.

Next, types of jackpots, types of small wins, and types of losses will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 71 and 72. As mentioned above, the results of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery 1 and special symbol lottery 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The jackpot symbols include "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T." In addition, in the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The small winning symbols include "special pattern 2_small winning pattern s" and "special pattern 2_small winning pattern t". At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 81. The losing symbols include "Special figure 1_Loss pattern S", "Special figure 1_Loss pattern T", and "Special figure 1_Loss pattern U".

When a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the first jackpot 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed in which the second large winning hole 15 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of a small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small winning symbol that has been won. A "jackpot game" to open the game is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the result of special symbol lottery winning a jackpot is called a type 1 jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passage to a specific area 16 is called a type 2 jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending after the final round game ends. (also written as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning game includes a small winning opening game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and a small winning opening game when the small winning opening game ends. It includes a later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a first-class jackpot is won), a jackpot game (first-class jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Specifically, in the lottery for special pattern 1, there is a possibility of winning "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special pattern 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 71, “Special drawing 1_Jackpot symbol S” and “Special drawing 1_Jackpot symbol T” are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds. The gaming state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

Here, the gaming state of this embodiment will be briefly explained. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment can control the game state to be a non-time saving state and a time saving state in which settings regarding the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 are different from the non-time saving state. The time saving state includes a normal time saving state where the game ball enters the second starting port 12 easily, and a slight time saving state (non-time saving state) where the setting makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12 than the normal time saving state. (normal time saving state). The ease with which the ball enters the second starting port 12 in the slight time saving state is not much different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, in this embodiment, the normal time saving state is a high base state in which many balls are expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time saving state and the non-time saving state are such that it is not expected that many balls will enter the second starting port 12. It is in a low base state. Note that details of the gaming state will be described later.

If you win the "jackpot symbol S", the gaming state after the jackpot game is a non-time saving state if the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state or a normal time saving state, but the gaming state at the time of winning is a slight time saving state. If it is, it means that the time is shortened. The number of time saving times in the slight time saving state is set to 800 times. The number of time saving times is the upper limit number of executions of special symbol fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the slight time saving state reaches 800, the slight time saving state ends. In this case, the non-time saving state is set.

On the other hand, the time-saving state after the jackpot game when the "jackpot symbol T" is won is the non-time-saving state, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state, a slight time-saving state, or a normal time-saving state. state.

Furthermore, if a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second large prize opening 15 is opened once. When a game ball enters the second big prize opening 15 opened by the small winning game and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, it becomes a jackpot win and the first A jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that opens the jackpot 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (a jackpot game triggered by passage to the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R. In addition, if the game ball does not pass to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. A jackpot game or a small win game is sometimes called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the grand prize opening is opened multiple times in one round.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, there are two types of small winning symbols that can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery (small winning symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special drawing 2 display 81b). Specifically, in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special drawing 2_small winning symbol s" and "special drawing 2_small winning symbol t".

"Small winning symbol s" and "small winning symbol t" are small winnings that always allow passage to the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly. In other words, in this embodiment, a small win based on the lottery of special drawing 2 has substantially the same meaning as a jackpot win.

In the small winning game based on each type of small winning symbols, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as you play the game correctly, it is possible to win multiple prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open, and the distribution member 16k is arranged so that at least one of the winning balls passes through the specific area 16. It is controlled to a passing permission state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) that is executed based on the passage of a game ball to the specific area 16, even if it is a type 2 jackpot game based on "small winning symbol s", a type 2 jackpot game based on "small winning symbol t" In the game as well, the first grand prize opening 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

If the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a slight time-saving state after the end of a type 2 jackpot game based on the "small winning symbol s", it is a non-time-saving state, and if it is a normal time-saving state, it is a normal time-saving state. state. The number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the gaming state after the end of the type 2 jackpot game based on the "small winning symbol t", regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state, This is a non-time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special drawing 2 is drawn mainly in the normal time-saving state, and the special drawing 2 is almost never drawn in the non-time-saving state or the slight time-saving state.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the winning symbol is a loss as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the losing symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 72, there are three types of losing symbols (losing symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) determined by the special drawing 1 lottery. Specifically, in the lottery for special pattern 1, one of "special pattern 1_loss pattern S", "special pattern 1_loss pattern T", and "special pattern 1_loss pattern U" is determined. It should be noted that the special drawing 2 lottery will not be determined as a loss.

"Special pattern 1_losing symbol S" is a normal losing that does not affect the transition of the gaming state, but "special symbol 1_ losing symbol T" and "special symbol 1_ losing symbol U" are triggers for controlling the time-saving state. This is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time-saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the gaming state after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed to be a time-saving state. However, if the time saving state is already in the time saving state (normal time saving state or slight time saving state) at the control timing to the time saving state based on a special loss (that is, when the time saving flag is ON), the setting of the gaming state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the gaming state after the stop display of the "losing symbol T" in the non-time saving state is a normal time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Further, the gaming state after the stop display of the "losing symbol U" in the non-time saving state is a slight time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 800 times.

<Game status>
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 73(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states: non-time saving state, normal time saving state, and slight time saving state. In other words, in any gaming state, it is determined that the normal symbol lottery is almost a hit. Note that in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

Further, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 73(B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. Note that the stop time of the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state, minute time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 73(C), the opening time of the electric chute 12D during auxiliary play is longer than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening time of the electric chute 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time-saving state, but is 2.5 seconds in the normal time-saving state and 0.1 seconds in the minute time-saving state.

Further, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as long as 60 seconds, and the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is opened for 0.05 seconds once. It is a very short time. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, even if you play the game by hitting right (a hitting method that allows the game ball to pass through the gate 13), it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as short as 1 second, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time saving state, by playing the game with the right hand, winnings to the electric chew 12D may occur frequently. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a gaming state where it is easier to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slight time saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost always be a win, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. It's as short as once. Therefore, in the slight time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation time and stop time of the normal symbol, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in the non-time saving state. Comparatively, although the setting is such that it is easy to win a prize in the Denchu 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the Denchu 12D even if you play the game with a right-handed player.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, the player cannot expect to win the electric chew 12D even if he plays right-handed, so the player advances the game by playing left-handed. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand because winnings to the electric chew 12D occur frequently by playing the game right. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, even during the jackpot game, the player plays the game with the right hand.

Similar to the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a gaming state in which it is easier to win the Denchu 12D compared to the non-time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the Denchu 12D than the normal time saving state. This is the gaming state of the settings. Further, the slight time saving state is a gaming state that is closer in nature to a non-time saving state than the normal time saving state, since winning the electric chew 12D is not expected. Note that the normal time saving state is an example of a specific gaming state, and the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state are examples of non-specific gaming states.

Incidentally, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called a "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called a "low base state". The slight time saving state is also an example of a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called the electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electrical support control state.

Note that the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation time and stop time of the normal symbols, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the gameplay.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, the determination of the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables for the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state (see FIG. 74).

First, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 74(A). In the non-time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 is drawn. The lottery results for special map 1 include jackpots and losses. In the case of a jackpot, either the special symbol variation pattern P80 that performs SP reach, or the special symbol variation pattern P81 that does not develop into SP reach and performs normal reach is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if it is a loss symbol S, which is a loss normally, or a loss symbol U, which is a control trigger for a slight time shortening state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special symbol fluctuation pattern that performs an SP reach If you select either P82 or special pattern variation pattern P83 in which a normal reach occurs without developing into an SP reach, and it is determined that there is no reach, a special pattern variation in which a reach is not formed according to the number of reserved balls. Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing symbol U is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the state shifts to the slight time saving state, but in this embodiment, since the slight time saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, the losing symbol U is not displayed in the non-time saving state. When drawn, the same special symbol variation pattern as when the losing symbol S is drawn is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stopped symbol is a loss symbol T which triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special symbol variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH entry effect is selected. When the losing symbol T is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state, the state shifts to the normal time saving state. The RUSH entry performance is a performance that suggests a transition to a normal time saving state. The RUSH entry performance will be described later.

Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the short time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 74(B). In this embodiment, the slight time saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player. That is, in this embodiment, the slight time saving state functions as a normal gaming state (normal gaming state). In the slight time saving state, the game is played by left-handed hitting, and the special drawing 1 lottery is performed. When the lottery result of special figure 1 is a jackpot, either the special figure variation pattern P90 that performs SP reach, or the special figure variation pattern P91 that does not develop into SP reach and performs normal reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of special figure 1 is a loss, regardless of which losing symbol it is, if it is determined that there is a reach, the special pattern variation pattern P92 that performs the SP reach or the SP reach Select any of the special pattern fluctuation patterns P93 that performs a normal reach without development, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special pattern fluctuation pattern P94 or P95 in which no reach is formed, depending on the number of reserved balls. . Even if you draw a special loss (losing symbol T, losing symbol U) in the slight time saving state, the game state is not newly set, so if you draw a special losing in the slight time saving state, you will draw a normal loss (losing symbol S). I try to select the same special pattern fluctuation pattern as in the previous case.

Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be explained based on FIG. 75(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player in this embodiment. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, and it is configured so that a small win is always won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and a V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time saving state means acquiring the next jackpot game (so-called confirmation of consecutive games).

In the normal time saving state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, and the special drawing 2 is drawn. As shown in FIG. 75(C), when the special drawing 2 is drawn in the normal time saving state, the special drawing variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special drawing 2. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, an immediate winning effect is executed. In the instant winning performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (Zero) indicating winning as soon as a reach is formed within a variable time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of microcomputer for game control>
Next, the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, the gaming state management process shown in FIG. 75 is performed instead of the gaming state management process (FIG. 64) described in the fourth embodiment. Note that the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment does not set the high probability state, so it does not perform processing related to the probability change flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the gaming state management process (S1602) in the fifth embodiment, it is first determined whether the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , if it is ON, the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of special symbol variations (special symbol variation display) executed during the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and if the value of the time-saving counter is "0". It is determined whether there is one (S2103). Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2110, and if it is "0", the time saving flag is turned off (S2104), and a gaming state flag updating process (S2105) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110.

In the gaming state flag update process (S2105), the value of the gaming state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current gaming state. As shown in the table in FIG. 75, the value of the gaming state flag is set to "0" if it is in a non-time saving state, "1" if it is in a normal time saving state, and "1" if it is in a slight time saving state. 2”. In this gaming state flag update process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned off, the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value "0" corresponding to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, it is then determined whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (loss pattern T or loss pattern U), the process proceeds to step S2130, but if it is a special loss, the time saving flag is turned on (S2112), and the number of time reductions according to the type of the losing pattern (Fig. 72 Reference) is set in the time saving counter (S2113), a gaming state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this game state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag has been turned ON based on the losing symbol T, the value of the gaming state flag is set to "1", which corresponds to the normal time saving state, and the losing symbol U If the time saving flag has been turned ON based on , the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the gaming state flag to "1", the gaming state is controlled to a normal time saving state, and by setting the value of the gaming state flag to "2", the gaming state is controlled to a slight time saving state. . In addition, each time-saving state in this embodiment ends when either the end condition is satisfied, that is, the special symbol change is performed for a predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number), or the next jackpot game is executed. .

Note that in this embodiment, the time-saving state is controlled based on a special loss only when the time-saving state is not (YES in step S2110). That is, even if a special loss is drawn in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in this embodiment, in the game state management process (S1602), a process regarding whether to end the time saving state is first performed (steps S2101 to S2105), and then a process regarding whether to control to the time saving state based on a special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, when the special loss is stopped and displayed due to the change in special figure 1 that is the final change in the slight time saving state, the small time saving state is transferred to the non-time saving state in the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, and the state is transferred to the non-time saving state in steps S2110 to S2114. The process will transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state. In addition, by configuring the process of steps S2110 to S2114 to be performed before the process of steps S2101 to S2105, it may be possible to configure a configuration in which the control is not changed to a new time saving state even if a special loss occurs due to the final change in the time saving state. .

In step S2130, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming state designation command including information on the gaming state flag (namely, information on the current gaming state) to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. By outputting this command, information on the current gaming state is notified to the sub-control board 120.

<Game flow in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the flow of game progress in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 76. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the gaming state that is least advantageous for the player among the non-time saving state, slight time saving state, and normal time saving state cannot be changed to the normal time saving state even if the losing symbol U is drawn. The time is short. The non-time saving state is a gaming state more advantageous than the slight time saving state in that it can be transferred to the normal time saving state by drawing the losing symbol U. In addition, the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the lottery of special drawing 2 is virtually certain, so among the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state, it is the most convenient for the player. This is an advantageous gaming situation.

In this embodiment, the slight time saving state functions as a normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 76, when the time is shortened, the production mode is set to the normal production mode (described in detail later). In the slight time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting left, and the special drawing 1 lottery is performed. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment is configured so that it does not directly shift from the slight time saving state to the normal time saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, he or she first proceeds with the game with the aim of transitioning to a non-time-saving state. If the "jackpot symbol S" is won in the slight time saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the slight time saving state again. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a non-time saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 800 times (the number of time saving times in the slight time saving state) without winning a jackpot in the small time saving state, the non-time saving state is also set.

The non-time saving state is a gaming state that can be shifted to the normal time saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player. If it is in a non-time saving state, the production mode is set to the chance production mode (described in detail later). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting left, and the special drawing 1 is drawn. In this form, the probability of winning a special lottery in the special drawing 1 is 1/5. At this time, there is a probability of 1/2 in which the losing symbol T (the symbol that triggers the normal time-saving state) is assigned, and a probability of 1/2 is that the symbol is distributed into the losing symbol U (the symbol that triggers the slight time-saving state). When the special loss won in the non-time saving state is the losing symbol U, the game is played with the aim of shifting to the non-time saving state again in order to shift to the slight time saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time saving state is the losing symbol T, the state shifts to the normal time saving state. The normal time saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the special drawing 2 lottery is substantially determined. In the case of the normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (described in detail later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting the right hand, and the special drawing 2 is drawn. In the special drawing 2 lottery, you will definitely win the small prize. At this time, the probability is 4/5 that the small winning symbol s (the symbol that triggers the normal time-saving state) will be distributed, and the probability of 1/5 will be that the small winning symbol t (the symbol that will trigger the non-time-saving state) will be distributed. It will be done. If the small win won in the normal time saving state is the small winning symbol s, the normal time saving state is set again after the type 2 jackpot game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called consecutive jackpots are confirmed.

On the other hand, if the small win won in the normal time saving state is the small winning symbol t, the non-time saving state is set after the type 2 jackpot game based on V passing. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing symbol T can be drawn, the normal time-saving state can be restored. On the other hand, if the losing symbol U is drawn, the state shifts to a slight time saving state. In this manner, in this embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, the time saving state does not directly shift to the slight time saving state, but is temporarily set to the non-time saving state. Therefore, there is an expectation that the normal time saving state will be set again, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, if you win a jackpot based on the drawing of special drawing 1 in a non-time saving state, whether you draw the jackpot symbol S or the jackpot symbol T, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be non-time saving. The state is now set. This prevents the player from being disappointed when the player is set to a slight time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the usual non-time-saving state even though he has won a big hit.

Here, the gaming state when the power is turned on will be explained. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 191, the gaming state at the time the power is turned on inherits the gaming state at the time the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a slightly time-saving state after the store closes the previous day, the gaming state when the power is turned on when the store opens remains in the slightly time-shortened state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the operation of the RAM clear switch 191, the flags and the like start up with their initial settings. That is, as shown in FIG. 76, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the gaming state becomes a non-time saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing symbol T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine that can be set to a state advantageous to the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming parlor (hall) or the like. In other words, the pachinko game machine of this embodiment can be said to be equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at a pachinko machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played since the RAM has been cleared by an employee of the gaming parlor, etc., You can look forward to playing games on gaming machines. That is, it can be expected that the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment will be improved immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Example of production in the fifth embodiment>
Next, an example of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 77 and 78. First, the production mode will be explained.

The production mode of this embodiment includes a "normal production mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a background image of space is displayed on the display section 50a. Includes the ``RUSH production mode'' that is displayed on the screen.

The normal performance mode (FIG. 77(A)) is a performance mode that is set when the time is shortened. As described above, the non-time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state advantageous to the player, so this slight time saving state substantially functions as a normal gaming state. Setting the normal performance mode (in other words, displaying a daytime background image) functions as a suggestion that the time is shortened.

The chance performance mode (FIG. 77(B)) is a performance mode that is set in a non-time saving state. The non-time saving state in this embodiment allows a transition to the normal time saving state based on the losing symbol T, so it is a chance for the player to make the transition to the normal time saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character ``chance'') functions as a suggestion that the user is in a non-time-saving state. Moreover, since the non-time saving state is set when the RAM is cleared, the setting of the chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that the RAM is cleared.

The RUSH production mode (FIG. 77(C)) is a production mode that is normally set when the time is shortened. When controlled to the normal time saving state, the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game based on the lottery of special drawing 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH effect mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is in the normal time saving state. It functions as a suggestion of what to do, and also functions as a suggestion of confirmation of execution of a jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time saving state, the game progresses with the aim of winning the second starting port 12 by right-handed hitting, so when controlled to the RUSH production mode, the performance control microcomputer 121 will not allow the game to proceed with right-handed hitting. A right-hand hitting image G108 informing that this should be done is displayed at the upper right corner of the display section 50a.

Next, the preview performance in the case of the normal performance mode will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 121 is capable of executing a dialogue preview performance in which a predetermined character is displayed together with dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. The types of lines in dialogue previews include lines that suggest a high level of expectation for a jackpot (e.g., "chance"), lines that suggest a higher level of expectation for a jackpot (e.g., "fierce heat"), etc. , there is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko game machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the performance shown in FIG. 77(D) as a dialogue preview performance of a specific dialogue. The production shown in FIG. 77(D) is a speech preview production in which a mini-character with an angel motif says the line "You may be prone to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning," and this allows the player to play the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is possible to understand that the advantageous setting function is installed, in other words, the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a dialogue preview performance of a specific dialogue functions as an explanatory performance that explains to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily need to be made as a speech preview performance, and may be provided as an ending performance accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting performance. .

Next, a description will be given of the RUSH entry effect performed when transitioning from the non-time saving state to the normal time saving state. If the losing symbol T is won based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special symbol fluctuation pattern P86 (see FIG. 74(A)). And when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a fluctuation performance accompanied by a RUSH entry performance. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH entry production (FIGS. 78 (A) and (B)), and then sets the middle production symbol EZ2 as the special symbol TZ. Stop display with special eyes. In this embodiment, the special symbol TZ is an image including the characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (namely RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination gaming state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific positions of "1, 3, and 5." In this way, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes, thereby suggesting a shift to the normal time saving state (RUSH performance mode). In other words, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 with special eyes is a performance that suggests to the player that the player is transitioning to a normal time saving state (drawing a losing symbol T) or a transition to RUSH performance mode. It functions as a production that suggests that something will happen. Note that the special eyes of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the specific eyes of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the fifth embodiment>
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, an employee of the game parlor or the like can clear the RAM (turn on the power switch 193 while pressing the RAM clear switch 191). It is possible to set the time saving state, and the non-time saving state is advantageous to the player in that it is possible to shift to the normal time saving state by drawing a losing symbol T. That is, according to this embodiment, employees of the gaming parlor and the like can set the gaming state to be advantageous to the players, and it is expected that the service to the players will be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the RAM clearing operation for setting the non-time saving state is an operation that can only be performed when the power is turned on. In other words, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on to open a gaming parlor, it is possible to set the gaming state of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to induce players who are looking to play in a non-time saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the gaming parlor opened.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when the non-time saving state is set, the chance production mode is set (FIG. 77(B)), so that an employee of the gaming hall or the like cannot perform the RAM clear operation. It is possible for the player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine with a high level of accuracy, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, it is possible to suggest by the dialogue preview production that there is a possibility that the game state will be set to be advantageous to the player by the operation of an employee of the game parlor or the like. (See FIG. 77(D)). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the gaming machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Example of modification of the fifth embodiment>
Modifications of the fifth embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modification of the fifth embodiment, the same components as the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples of the fifth embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the fifth embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. Furthermore, the configuration included in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above and its modification examples (including the second embodiment and the third embodiment), and/or the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment described above and The configuration included in the modified example can be adopted in the gaming machine understood from the fifth embodiment and its modified example to the extent that it does not interfere with the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is not set to the normal time saving state even if a jackpot is won in the slight time saving state, but the winning in the slight time saving state is controlled to the normal time saving state. A jackpot symbol may be provided as an opportunity.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, there is one type of loss pattern (loss pattern U) that triggers the transition to the slight time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the slight time reduction state is set to 800. A plurality of types of losing symbols may be provided, and the number of time saving times in the slight time saving state may be varied depending on the type of losing symbols. For example, when the time saving state is set based on a certain losing symbol, the number of time saving times is set to a small number such as 30 times, and when the time saving state is set to the slight time saving state based on another losing symbol, the number of time saving times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is large, it is possible to provide some time-saving states that are easy to shift to a non-time-saving state and others that are difficult to shift to, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, the time saving state is not directly shifted to the slight time saving state, but is set to the non-time saving state. However, it is not possible to directly shift to the slight time saving state. Even if there is a configuration (a configuration in which the gaming state after a jackpot game based on a win in the normal time saving state is set to a slight time saving state, or a structure in which the gaming state is set to a slight time saving state at the end of the normal time saving state due to the expiration of the number of time saving times). good.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, by setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG including the word "chance"), it is suggested that there is no time-saving state; The suggestion that the gaming machine has had its RAM cleared may be made by other effects, such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in gaming states other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the performance that suggests a non-time-saving state (suggestive performance) does not have to be performed all the time when the time-saving state is non-time-saving, but is performed only if the performance execution lottery is won. It may also be something that is done. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, the effect suggesting that the time-saving state is not executed is executed only when winning the lottery. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the state has been controlled from a non-time saving state to a slight time saving state based on the losing symbol U, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Since the state in which the display of the band image OG including the character ``chance'' is not displayed in the chance production mode is the same as the normal production mode, it can be said that both are set to the same production mode.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the state is controlled to the non-time saving state, and when the state is controlled to the non-time saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (the state where the jackpot game is being executed). In addition, even when the time saving state is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the number of time saving times being used up in a slight time saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. The chance production mode is set only when the time saving state is controlled, and the non-time saving mode is set when the time saving state is controlled in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, or in response to the number of time saving times being exhausted in the slight time saving state. When the state is controlled, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if the state is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time saving state in response to the number of time savings being exhausted in a slight time saving state, It may be configured to be set to the same production mode as the time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 191 is a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation that does not use the RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear ) may also be used. For example, a dedicated switch for setting the non-time-saving state may be provided, and the non-time-saving state may be set by pressing the dedicated switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, the non-time saving state may be set when a dedicated switch is pressed during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting performance is performed). Note that it is preferable that the dedicated switch be provided in a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it, such as by mounting it on the main control board 100. In other words, like the RAM clear switch 191, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 2 is opened.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine that can execute a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big prize opening 15, but the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine. It is also possible to use a type of game machine other than a one-type and two-type mixed machine, such as a "definite loop machine" or a "definitely variable loop machine." When using an ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "pattern variable machine" in which the transition to a high probability state with a high probability of winning a jackpot is determined based on the type of special symbol won, or a V attacker (specific area It may also be a so-called "V-probability changing machine" in which transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area within a big winning device (having a big prize winning device). In addition, when configured as an "ST machine" or "definitely variable loop machine", it is configured so that the jackpot can be won in both the lottery for special map 1 and the lottery for special map 2, and the lottery for special map 2 is more likely than the lottery for special map 1. It is preferable that the lottery is advantageous in that it is easier to execute a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls can be acquired, and that the game state after the end of the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Furthermore, even if a special loss is drawn in a high probability state, the settings of the gaming state will not be changed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, parameters in various time-saving states (normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each jackpot symbol, each small prize symbol, and each loss symbol can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, but depending on the desired gaming experience, it may also be a so-called Hanemono (2 type machine) without the 1 type jackpot. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to win a so-called "direct jackpot" in either the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the upper limit number of execution times (time saving number) of the variable display of special symbols in the time saving state is counted regardless of whether the variable display of special symbol 1 is executed or the variable display of special symbol 2 is executed. In addition to this total upper limit number of executions, there is also the upper limit number of executions of special figure 1, which counts only the variable display of special figure 1, and the upper limit number of executions of special figure 1, which counts only the variable display of special figure 2. FIG. 2 An upper limit number of times of execution may be set, and the time saving state may be terminated when any one of the number of times is satisfied. In addition, the special figure 1 upper limit number of times of execution and the special figure 2 upper limit number of times of execution can be set to a different value from the total upper limit number of times of execution. In addition, instead of setting a total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special figure 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number of times is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 It may be configured such that only an upper limit number of executions is set and the time saving state ends when this number is satisfied.

<Invention shown in the fifth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment and its modifications described above, inventions of the following means are shown. In the explanation of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention related to means S1 is
A prize opening into which a game ball can enter (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12),
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that sets a game state based on the game ball entering the input prize hole;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) for setting a performance mode for performing the performance,
The gaming states include a first state (normal time-saving state) in which the game ball easily enters the winning hole, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the winning hole than in the first state. condition) and,
The game control means may set the second state as an initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the production control means selects a specific mode (chance production mode) including a predetermined suggestion production (for example, display of the band image OG shown in FIG. 77(B)) as the production mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting.

The invention related to means S2 is:
A gaming machine according to means S1,
The gaming state includes a third state (slight time saving state) which is different from the second state and in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the prize slot than the first state,
The game control means is capable of making a special determination as to whether or not to set the first state (determination as to whether to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing symbol T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined in the special determination when the first state is set than the third state.

The invention related to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing symbol U that triggers the transition to the slight time saving state) is satisfied in the second state. Sometimes,
The game machine is characterized in that the performance control means continues the specific mode even if the gaming state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-47326, after a jackpot game, the gaming machine is sometimes controlled to a time-saving state in which the gaming ball easily enters the starting slot. However, there is room for improvement regarding the performance in gaming machines that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By incorporating improved effects, it is expected that the game will become more interesting. Therefore, the invention related to means S provides a game machine described in JP-A No. 2018-47326, in which "the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily. The difference is that a difficult second state is sometimes set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to increasing the interest of the game through performance.

13. Other Modification Examples Other modification examples common to each of the above embodiments will be described below. In the above embodiment, the first starting port 11 (fixed starting port) does not change the ease with which the game ball enters, and the second starting port 12 (variable starting port, electric Although a starting port related to the chew 12D is provided, only one of them may be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority over the special figure 1 determination process (the variable display of special figure 2 is performed with priority over the variable display of special figure 1), It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special figure 1 determination process is performed with priority over the special figure 2 determination process (the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed with priority over the variable display of the special figure 2). In this case, it is preferable to make the special drawing 1 drawing a drawing that is easier to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than the special drawing 2 drawing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it can also be applied to other pinball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball game machine. Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game performance of the game machine can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. In other words, the present invention is suitable for so-called symbol probability changing machines (gaming machines in which transition to a high-probability state is determined based on the type of winning symbol) and so-called V-probability machines (specification in the big prize opening), as long as it does not interfere with the game. A game machine that is controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of a region (V region)), a so-called variable loop type gaming machine (once it is controlled to a high probability state, it is controlled to a high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game) It is possible to suitably adopt the present invention in a so-called ST machine (a game machine with a series of consecutive games), a so-called ST machine (a game machine with a constant variable number of cuts), a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine, a honeymoon type game machine, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed variably in synchronization with the special symbol variable display, but instead of being composed of three symbols like the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, two symbols are displayed. It may also be composed of patterns other than three, such as three. For example, two separate patterns may be provided, special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Further, one common symbol may be provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In these cases, the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 may display the information, and the sub-control board 120 may perform the control. Further, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided in an area other than the game area 6 of the game board 1. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the sub control board 120 performs basic control related to the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (game control). Although the control of the game and the control of the presentation are performed using different boards, they may be configured to be performed using a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

In addition, when referring to "a state advantageous to the player (advantageous gaming state, advantageous state, or special gaming state)", not all jackpot gaming states need to have a configuration corresponding to this. For example, a jackpot game state that is scheduled to be controlled to a high probability state after that is configured to correspond to a "state advantageous to the player", or a jackpot game state in which a relatively large number of prize balls such as 10R can be obtained. may correspond to a "state advantageous to the player". Further, the "state advantageous to the player" does not refer to a jackpot gaming state, but may refer to a high probability state, or may refer to a high base state (time saving state). When we define "a state advantageous to the player" as a high probability state or a high base state (time saving state), various effects that make the player expect to be in an "advantageous state" are limited to special symbols. The performance is not limited to the performance during the variable display, but may be a performance performed at other timings, such as a performance during a jackpot game.

PY1...Pachinko gaming machine 11...First starting port 46...Heso lamp (first light emitting part, specific light emitting part)
48...Chance lamp (second light emitting part)
50a...Display unit 50...Image display device 101...Microcomputer for game control 121...Microcomputer for production control HA...Pending icon (pending display)
TA…Applicable icon (pending display)

Claims (2)

It is possible to control the advantageous state advantageous to the player,
comprising a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section capable of indicating the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state by a difference in emitted light color;
When winning a prize in a predetermined starting slot, there are cases where the first light emitting part emits light and cases where the second light emitting part emits light,
A pending display can be displayed in response to winning in the predetermined starting slot,
The pending display can be displayed in any of a plurality of display colors having different expectations,
When executing a hold change effect in which the hold display is displayed in a special display color that has a higher expectation level than the normal display color among the plurality of display colors when winning a prize in the predetermined starting slot, There are times when a specific light emitting effect is performed in conjunction with which the first light emitting section emits light in a color corresponding to a display color, and there are times when the specific light emitting effect is not performed.
When the specific light emitting effect is executed in conjunction with the pending change effect, the level of expectation is higher than when the pending change effect is executed and the specific light emitting effect is not executed. A gaming machine with special features. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the first light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color, the second light emitting unit emits light in a color different from the predetermined color and does not correspond to the display color of the hold display. A game machine characterized in that it may emit light in color .

Images